Introduction 9
Child Safety 17
Child seats...........................................19
Child seat positioning ...................................19
Booster seats .........................................21
Installing child safety seats ...............................24
Child safety locks ......................................34
Safety Belts 35
Fastening the safety belts ................................37
Safety belt height adjustment .............................40
Safetybeltwarninglightandindicatorchime..................41
Safety belt-minder .....................................42
Child restraint and safety belt maintenance ...................44
Supplementary Restraints System 45
Driver and passenger airbags .............................47
Side airbags ..........................................49
Safety canopy curtain airbags .............................50
Crash sensors and airbag indicator .........................52
Airbag disposal........................................53
Keys and Remote Control 54
General information on radio frequencies.....................54
Remote control .......................................55
Keys ...............................................55
Replacing a lost key or remote control.......................57
MyKey 58
Settings, MyKey .......................................58
Creating.............................................59
Clearing.............................................60
System status.........................................60
Remote start, MyKey ...................................60
Troubleshooting, MyKey .................................62
Table of Contents 1
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Locks 64
Locking and unlocking ..................................64
SecuriCode™ keyless entry keypad .........................72
Security 75
SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system .......................75
Anti-theft alarm .......................................77
Steering Wheel 79
Adjusting the steering wheel ..............................79
Steering wheel controls .................................80
Pedals 82
Adjustable pedals ......................................82
Wipers and Washers 83
Windshield wipers .....................................83
Rain-sensing wipers ....................................83
Windshield washers ....................................84
Rear-window wiper and washer ............................84
Lighting 85
Lighting control .......................................85
Autolamps ...........................................86
Daytime running lamps ..................................87
Front fog lamps.......................................87
Directionindicators ....................................87
Interior lamps ........................................88
Windows and Mirrors 90
Power windows .......................................90
Exteriormirrors.......................................91
Interiormirrors .......................................93
Sunvisors...........................................95
Moonroof ............................................95
2 Table of Contents
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Instrument Cluster 97
Gauges .............................................97
Warning lamps and indicators .............................99
Audible warnings and indicators ..........................103
Information Displays 104
Controls............................................104
Information messages ..................................110
Audio System 115
AM/FM/CD with SYNC .................................117
Rear seat controls.....................................120
Auxiliary input jack ...................................123
USBport...........................................124
Satellite radio information ...............................124
Rear seat entertainment system...........................127
Climate Control 146
Dual automatic temperature control........................146
Rear window defroster .................................152
Seats 153
Sitting in the correct position ............................153
Head restraints.......................................154
Power seats .........................................156
Memory function .....................................158
Rear seats ..........................................161
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 171
Car2U威 home automation system..........................171
HomeLink威 wireless control system ........................176
Table of Contents 3
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Auxiliary Power Points 181
Storage Compartments 184
Center console .......................................184
Overhead console .....................................184
Starting and Stopping the Engine 185
Ignition switch .......................................186
Engine block heater ...................................188
Fuel and Refueling 190
Fuel quality .........................................191
Refueling...........................................194
Fuel consumption .....................................195
Transmission 200
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 205
Four wheel drive .....................................205
Brakes 213
Brakes .............................................213
Hints on driving with anti-lock brakes ......................214
Parking brake........................................214
Traction Control 215
TractionControl™....................................215
Stability Control 216
AdvanceTrac威 .......................................217
Parking Aids 218
Sensing system.......................................218
Rear-view camera system ...............................221
4 Table of Contents
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cruise Control 224
Using cruise control ...................................224
Driving Aids 226
Steering ............................................226
Air suspension .......................................227
Load Carrying 228
Roof racks and load carriers .............................228
Vehicle loading .......................................229
Cargo management system ..............................236
Towing 239
Trailertowing........................................239
Wrecker towing ......................................247
Recreational towing ...................................248
Driving Hints 249
Economical driving ....................................249
Floormats..........................................251
Roadside Emergencies 253
Getting roadside assistance ..............................253
Hazard warning flashers ................................254
Fuel cut-off switch ....................................254
Jump-starting the vehicle ...............................255
Customer Assistance 258
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) .......................265
Reporting safety defects (Canada only) .....................265
Fuses 266
Changing a fuse ......................................266
Fuse specification chart ................................267
Table of Contents 5
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance 275
General information ...................................275
Opening and closing the hood ............................276
Under hood overview ..................................277
Engine oil dipstick ....................................278
Engine oil check......................................278
Engine coolant check ..................................279
Automatic transmission fluid check ........................283
Brake fluid check .....................................284
Fuel filter...........................................284
Washer fluid check ....................................285
Battery ............................................285
Checking the wiper blades ..............................286
Changing the wiper blades ..............................287
Air filter(s) .........................................288
Adjusting the headlamps ................................291
Changing a bulb ......................................292
Removing a headlamp ..................................293
Vehicle Care 298
Cleaning products.....................................298
Cleaning the exterior ..................................298
Waxing.............................................300
Repairing minor paint damage ............................300
Cleaning the engine ...................................300
Cleaning the windows and wiper blades .....................301
Cleaning the interior ...................................301
Cleaning the instrument panel and instrument cluster lens .......302
Cleaning leather seats ..................................303
Cleaning the alloy wheels ...............................303
Vehicle storage .......................................304
6 Table of Contents
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Wheels and Tires 307
Tire care ...........................................310
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ...................326
Changing a road wheel .................................330
Technical specifications.................................338
Wheel lug nut torque ..................................338
Capacities and Specifications 339
Engine specifications ..................................339
Part numbers ........................................343
Vehicle identification number ............................344
Vehicle certification label ...............................345
Transmission code designation............................345
Accessories 346
Accessories .........................................346
Ford Extended Service Plan 348
Scheduled Maintenance 351
Normal scheduled maintenance and log .....................356
SYNC姞 368
Pairing your phone for the first time .......................373
911 Assist™ .........................................387
Vehicle Health Report ..................................390
Table of Contents 7
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Navigation System (If Equipped) 414
Statusbars..........................................417
Loading pictures......................................417
Voice recognition .....................................419
Accessing media features ...............................424
Jukebox features .....................................441
Recording (saving) music to your jukebox ...................441
Accessing the music in your jukebox .......................442
Creating a playlist.....................................443
Where am I?.........................................444
Accessing the help screen ...............................447
Navigation features ....................................448
Appendices 457
Index 474
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to
print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change
specifications, design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval
system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our
written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2012
8 Table of Contents
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you
know about it, the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Always drive with due care and attention when
using and operating the controls and features on your vehicle.
Note: This manual describes a range of product features and options,
sometimes before they are generally available. Therefore, you may find
options in this manual that are not found on your vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different
models, so they may appear different than your vehicle. However, the
essential information in the illustrations is always correct.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable
laws and regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. It is an integral
part of the vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a component as right or left,
which is determined by the side of the vehicle based on sitting in the
seat.
A. Right
B. Left
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant steps toward this aim.
A
B
Introduction 9
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
WARNING: You risk death or serious injury to yourself and
others if you do not follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol.
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Safety alert See Owner’s
Manual
Anti-lock
braking
system
Avoid
smoking,
flames, or
sparks
Battery Battery acid
Brake fluid –
non
petroleum
base
Brake system Cabin air
filter
Check fuel
cap
Child Safety
Door Lock
and Unlock
Child seat
lower anchor
Child seat
tether anchor
Cruise control Do not open
when hot
Engine air
filter
Engine
coolant
Engine
coolant
temperature
Engine oil Explosive gas Fan warning
Fasten safety
belt
Front airbag Front fog
lamps
Fuel pump
reset
Fuse
compartment
Hazard
warning
flasher
10 Introduction
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Symbol Description Symbol Description Symbol Description
Heated rear
window
Interior
luggage
compartment
release
Jack
Lighting
control
Low tire
pressure
warning
Maintain
correct fluid
level
Panic alarm Parking aid
system
Parking brake
system
Power
steering fluid
Power
windows front
and rear
Power
window
lockout
Service
engine soon
Side airbag Stability
control
Windshield
defrost and
demist
Windshield
washer and
wiper
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing
your vehicle. Additionally, when your vehicle is in for service or repair,
Ford Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC威 Vehicle
Health Report, you consent that certain diagnostic information may also
be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic information may be used for any
purpose. See the SYNC威 chapter for more information.
Introduction 11
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle; this data will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was travelling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data or information
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) is recorded (see
limitations regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However, parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement,
that have such special equipment, can read the information if
they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent, unless pursuant to court
order or where required by law enforcement, other government
authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority.
Other parties may seek to access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
12 Introduction
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Including to the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data
Recorders applies to SYNC威 or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911
Assist may, through any paired and connected cell phone, disclose
to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving
the deployment of an airbag or, in certain vehicles, the activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to electronically or verbally
provide to 911 operators the vehicle location (such as latitude and
longitude), and/or other details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the occupants to assist 911 operators
to provide the most appropriate emergency services. If you do not
want to disclose this information, do not activate the 911 Assist
feature. See your SYNC威 chapter for more information.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped, U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s
current location, travel direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches that you request. If you do
not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information, do not
activate the service. Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses
to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle
travel information. For more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions. See your SYNC威
supplement for more information.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING: Some constituents of engine exhaust, certain vehicle
components, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE MATERIAL
Note: Certain components in your vehicle, such as airbag modules,
safety belt pretensioners, and remote control batteries, may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate for
more information.
Introduction 13
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD CREDIT (U.S. ONLY)
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing and lease plans to help you
acquire your vehicle. If you have financed or leased your vehicle through
Ford Credit, thank you for your business.
For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us, as well
as help manage your account.
Phone: 1-800-727-7000
For more information regarding Ford Credit, as well as access Account
Manager, please go to www.fordcredit.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts.
We recommend that you demand the use of genuine Ford and Motorcraft
parts whenever your vehicle requires scheduled maintenance or repair.
You can clearly identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts by looking for
the Ford, FoMoCo or Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure that your vehicle provides
years of service is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform to the specifications detailed
in this owner’s manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or
exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent
requirements for fit, finish, structural integrity, corrosion protection and
dent resistance. During vehicle development, we validate these parts
deliver the intended level of protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level of protection is to use genuine
Ford replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement parts are the only
replacement parts that benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage caused to
your vehicle as a result of the failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For additional information, see the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
14 Introduction
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by
your vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the warranty
information that is provided to you along with your owner’s manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
WARNING: Please read the Supplementary Restraints System
chapter. Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats
should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
Using your vehicle with a snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for snowplowing.
Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package.
Using your vehicle as an ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an ambulance.
Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Ambulance Preparation
Package.
Introduction 15
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is becoming increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However, you
must not compromise your own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can enhance personal safety and
security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency situations.
Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile communication equipment includes, but is not limited to, cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, text messaging devices and
portable two-way radios.
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE (NON–UNITED STATES/CANADA) VEHICLE
SPECIFIC INFORMATION
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the features and options that
are described in this Owner’s Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By referring to the market
unique supplement, if provided, you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. This
Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and Canadian Markets.
Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built
for Export. Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
16 Introduction
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your child is secured properly in a
device that is appropriate for their height, age and weight. Child
safety restraints must be bought separately from your vehicle. Failure
to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints are based on probable
child height, age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum requirements of law. Ford
recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician (CPST) and consulting your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and is compatible with and
properly installed in your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting station
and CPST, contact the NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or on the
internet at http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, check with your local
St. John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial ministry of transportation, your
local St. John Ambulance office at http://www.sfa.ca, or Transport
Canada at 1–800–333–0371 (http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height, age,
and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Recommended
restraint type
Infants
or
toddlers
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or
less (generally age four or
younger).
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier,
convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
Child Safety 17
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child size, height, weight, or
age
Recommended
restraint type
Small
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety
seat (generally children who are
less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb
(36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Larger
children
Children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a
belt-positioning booster seat
(generally children who are at
least 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or
greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by
child restraint manufacturer).
Use a vehicle safety
belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the
hips, shoulder belt
centered across the
shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
• You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the U.S. and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that small children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local and
state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain children twelve (12) years of
age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. Accident
statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in a front seating position.
18 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD SEATS
Use a child safety seat (sometimes
called an infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat) for infants,
toddlers or children weighing
40 pounds (18 kilograms) or less
(generally age four or younger).
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move your
vehicle seat all the way back. When possible, all children age 12 and
under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position. If all
children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating
position, properly restrain the largest child in the front seat.
WARNING: Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings
provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if
the restraint device is appropriate for your child’s size, height, weight, or
age. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your child’s height,
age, or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while your vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision, which may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING: Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child.
They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or
death in a collision.
Child Safety 19
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster
seat. These objects may become projectiles in a collision or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury.
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
WARNING: Do not leave children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Restraint
Type
Child
Weight
Use any attachment method as indicated
below by X.
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and
top
tether
anchor)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
Safety
belt
and
top
tether
anchor
Safety
belt and
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety
belt
only
Rear-
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Forward-
facing
child seat
Up to
48 lb
(21 kg)
XXX
Forward-
facing
child seat
Over
48 lb
(21 kg)
XX
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against your vehicle seat. It may
be necessary to lift or remove the head restraint. See the Seats chapter
for information on head restraints.
20 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Never place, or allow a child to place, the shoulder
belt under a child’s arm or behind the back because it reduces
the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk
of injury or death in a collision.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for children who have outgrown or no
longer properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less
than 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four (4) and
less than age twelve (12), and between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100 pounds (45 kilograms) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight (8), a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions when the child is seated without a booster seat:
• Can the child sit all the way
back against your vehicle seat
back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the
seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with your vehicle lap and
shoulder belt.
Child Safety 21
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Types of Booster Seats
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a removable shield, remove the shield.
If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint, a
backless booster seat may place your child’s head (as measured at the
tops of the ears) above the top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or
head restraint and lap/shoulder belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot find a seating position that
adequately supports your child’s head, a high back booster seat would be
a better choice.
22 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Children and booster seats vary in size and shape. Choose a booster that
keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips, never up across the
stomach, and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and
rest snugly near the center of the shoulder. The following drawings
compare the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to
the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder. The
drawings also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the
child’s hips.
If the booster seat slides on your vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster
seat. Check with the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Child Safety 23
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Children 12 and under should be properly restrained
in the rear seat whenever possible.
WARNING: Depending on where you secure a child restraint,
and depending on the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower
anchors, rendering those features potentially unusable. To avoid risk of
injury, occupants should only use seating positions where they are able
to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with combination lap/shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap
and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place your vehicle seat back in the upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. See Step 5. This
vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with
combination lap/shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat,
the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat.
24 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
Child Safety 25
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger
and rear seats. This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. The belt will click as it
retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5
and 6.
8. Remove remaining slack from the
belt. Force the seat down with extra
weight, e.g., by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in
order to force slack from the belt.
This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the
extra weight of the child is added to the child restraint. It also helps to
achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat is equipped). See Using
Tether Straps in this chapter.
26 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
10. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place.
To check this, grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side
to side and forward and back. There should be no more than 1 inch (2.5
centimeters) of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger
Safety Technician (CPST) to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with your local St. John Ambulance office for
referral to a CPST.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Never attach two child safety seats to the same
anchor. In a crash, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury
or death.
The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two
lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet
(called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that
seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH
equipped seating positions in your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat,
however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether strap must also be attached to
the proper top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has been provided
with your child seat. Ford Motor Company recommends the use of a
child safety seat having a top tether strap. See Using Tether Straps in
this chapter.
Child Safety 27
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the
seating positions marked with the child seat symbol.
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat
between the cushion and seatback, below the locator symbols on the seat
back. Follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to properly install
a child seat with LATCH attachments.
The locator symbols are on round plastic buttons for the center seat and
on rectangular tags for the outboard seats.
28 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps.
See Using Tether Straps in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors
shown.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that the seat is properly
attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug the
child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to
the vehicle. The seat should move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being
injured in a crash greatly increases.
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower Anchors for Attaching
Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the safety belt or the LATCH lower
anchors may be attached first, provided a proper installation is achieved.
Attach the tether strap afterward, if included with the child seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks
to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor.
Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about
ordering a tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in the vehicle.
Some of the rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
In the third row center seating position, the tether anchor is a loop at
the bottom of the seatback.
Child Safety 29
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
• Second row bench seat
• Second row bucket seats
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown.
The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other
than the correct tether anchor.
Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt,
the lower anchors of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach the top
tether strap.
If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments, and have
attached the top tether strap to the proper top tether anchor, do not
tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat
cushion when the child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash.
Perform the following steps to install a child safety seat with tether
anchors:
Second row seating positions
1. For center seating positions, route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat.
For outboard seating positions, route the tether strap under the head
restraint and between the head restraint posts. If the top of the safety
seat hits the head restraint, recline the seatback slightly to obtain proper
fit.
30 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
• Second row outboard seating
positions
• Second row center seating
position (if equipped)
3. Grasp the tether strap and
position it to the seat frame.
Child Safety 31
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Rotate the tether strap, and clip
the tether strap to the anchor on
the seat frame.
5. Rotate the tether strap clip.
6. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Third row center seating position
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
32 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Locate the anchor webbing loop for the seating position.
• You may need to pull back the top of the hinged panel along the
bottom of the seat back to access the tether anchor.
3. Clip the tether strap through the anchor loop as shown. If the tether
strap is clipped incorrectly, the child safety seat may not be retained
properly in the event of a collision.
4. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. If the
safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a
collision greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap, and the
child restraint manufacturer recommends its use, Ford also recommends
its use.
Child Safety 33
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors cannot be opened from the
inside.
The childproof locks are located on
the rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door.
Move the lock control up/down to
engage/disengage the childproof
lock.
34 Child Safety
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with your seat back upright
and the lap belt snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit
where they can be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap
while the vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision.
WARNING: All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
WARNING: Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific
safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt
on the outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
WARNING: When possible, all children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear seating position.
Safety Belts 35
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles before you place a child
anywhere near them.
WARNING: Front and rear seat occupants, including pregnant
women, should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an
accident.
All seating positions in this vehicle have lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always properly wear their safety belts,
even when an airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts.
• shoulder safety belt with automatic locking mode, (except driver
safety belt).
• height adjuster at the front outboard seating positions
• safety belt pretensioner at the front outboard seating positions.
• Safety belt warning light and chime. See Safety Belt
Warning Light and Indicator Chime later in this chapter.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in the
Supplemental Restraints System chapter.
The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side collisions, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the
safety belts firmly against the occupant’s body when activated. This helps
increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. In frontal collisions, the
safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or, if the collision is of
sufficient severity, together with the front airbags.
36 Safety Belts
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts.
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, press the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING: Always ride and drive with your seat back upright
and the safety belt properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. See the
following figure.
Safety Belts 37
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Pregnant women should always
wear their safety belts. The lap belt
portion of a combination lap and
shoulder belt should be positioned
low across the hips below the belly
and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of
the shoulder and the center of the
chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNING: After any vehicle collision, the safety belt system at
all passenger seating positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
WARNING: BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE
REPLACED if the safety belt assembly automatic locking retractor
feature or any other safety belt function is not operating properly when
checked by an authorized dealer. Failure to replace the belt and retractor
assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder
belts. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode, and the
front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of
locking modes described as follows:
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out
too quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing
out again in a slow and controlled manner.
38 Safety Belts
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat, except a booster,
is installed in passenger front or rear seating positions. Children 12 years
old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See the Child Safety chapter.
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled out.
Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
Disconnect the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNING: Do not use extensions to change the fit of the
shoulder belt across the torso.
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Safety Belts 39
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Squeeze the side release buttons
and slide the height adjuster up or
down.
2. Pull down on the height adjuster
to make sure it is locked in place.
Second Row Comfort Guide
WARNING: Position the safety belt comfort guide so that the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a collision.
The second row outboard lap and
shoulder belt is equipped with a belt
comfort guide. This guide is attached
to the quarter trim panel and is used to
adjust the comfort of the shoulder belt
for smaller occupants in the outboard
second row seats.
40 Safety Belts
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To adjust the comfort guide:
1. Slip the shoulder belt into the
belt guide (the portion of the belt
between the latch tongue and the
D-ring, not the portion where the
belt exits from the quarter trim
panel).
2. Slide the guide up or down along the webbing so that the belt is
centered on the occupant’s shoulder.
SAFETY BELT WARNING LIGHT AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the
driver’s safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle’s
ignition is turned on.
Conditions of Operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
Safety Belts 41
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY BELT-MINDER姞
This feature supplements the safety belt warning function by providing
additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating
the safety belt warning light when the driver’s seat is occupied and the
safety belt is unbuckled.
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the on
position or less than
1-2 minutes have elapsed since
the ignition switch has been
turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature will not
activate.
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes
have elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
The driver’s safety belt
becomes unbuckled for
approximately one minute
while the vehicle is traveling at
least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition
switch has been turned to on...
The Belt-Minder威 feature is activated
- the safety belt warning light
illuminates and the warning chime
sounds for six seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for
approximately five minutes or until
the safety belts are buckled.
42 Safety Belts
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder姞 Feature
WARNING: While the design allows you to deactivate your
Belt-Minder威, this system is designed to improve your chances of
being safely belted and surviving an accident. We recommend you leave
the Belt-Minder威 system activated for yourself and others who may use
the vehicle. To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate or activate
the Belt-Minder威 feature while driving the vehicle.
Read Steps1-9thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation
and activation programming procedure.
The Belt-Minder威 feature can be deactivated or activated by performing
the following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set.
• the transmission selector lever is in position P.
• the ignition is off.
• all vehicle doors are closed.
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. DO NOT START THE ENGINE.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off (approximately
1–2 minutes).
• Steps 3 and 4 must be completed within 60 seconds or the procedure
will have to be repeated.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times, ending with the
safety belt unbuckled. The safety belt warning light will come on for
about three seconds.
4. Within seven seconds of the safety belt warning light turning off,
buckle then unbuckle the safety belt. The safety warning light will flash.
• This will disable Belt-Minder威 if it is currently enabled, or enable
Belt-Minder威 if it is currently disabled.
Safety Belts 43
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically
to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. Inspect the
vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks, tears
or cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety belt assemblies, including
retractors, buckles, front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped), child safety
seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching hardware, should be
inspected after a collision. Read the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint. Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be
replaced. However, if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer
finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
For proper care of soiled safety belts, see Cleaning the Interior in the
Vehicle Care chapter.
44 Safety Belts
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly or gently, and the
risk of injury from a deploying airbag is the greatest close to the
trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle, including the driver,
should always properly wear their safety belts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is provided.
WARNING: Always transport children 12 years old and under in
the back seat and always properly use appropriate child
restraints.
WARNING: Never place your arm over the airbag module as a
deploying airbag can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: Several airbag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after inflation.
WARNING: If the airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again and must be replaced immediately. If the airbag is
not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
Supplementary Restraints System 45
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to
work with the safety belts to help protect the driver and right front
passenger from certain upper body injuries. Airbags DO NOT inflate
slowly; there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a cloud of harmless powdery
residue if an airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation. After airbag
deployment, it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery residue or smell
the burnt propellant. This may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (e.g., baking soda) that result
from the combustion process that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic. While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the
noise associated with a deploying airbag. Because airbags must inflate
rapidly and with considerable force, there is the risk of death or serious
injuries, such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise
out of position at the time of airbag deployment. Thus, it is extremely
important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the
airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not required.
RESTRAINT SAFETY SYSTEM
The Restraint Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal
crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further
reduce the risk of airbag-related injuries. The system is able to analyze
different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in
a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle’s Restraint Safety System consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints Control Module (RCM) with impact and safing sensors.
46 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Restraint system warning light and backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage sensors, driver seat position
sensor, and indicator lights.
How does the Restraint Safety System work?
The Restraint Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your
vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the restraints control module. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the safety belt pretensioners
and/or either one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag supplemental
restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions.
SOS POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM™
The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn
(intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag
equipped on your vehicle, such as front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy威.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• the hazard control button is pressed
• the panic button (if equipped) is pressed on the remote entry
transmitter, or
• your vehicle runs out of power.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER AIRBAGS
WARNING: Never place your arm or any objects over an airbag
module. Placing your arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries. Objects placed on or over the
airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the
airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. If
you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Supplementary Restraints System 47
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The driver and front passenger
airbags will deploy during significant
frontal and near frontal collisions.
The driver and passenger front airbag system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between an occupant’s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two degrees) from the upright
position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts, it is
very important that they continue to sit properly. A properly seated
occupant sits upright, leaning against the seat back, and centered on the
seat cushion, with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. Sitting
improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward,
leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of
injury during a crash is greatly increased.
48 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag.
If you must use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the
seat all the way back.
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the airbag cover, on the side of the seat backs (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a
deploying airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat covers. The use of
accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The side airbag
could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
airbag, its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Supplementary Restraints System 49
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: If the side airbag has deployed, the airbag will not
function again. The side airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seat backs of the
front seats. In certain lateral collisions, the airbag on the side affected by
the collision will be inflated. The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact collisions.
The system consists of the
following:
• a label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are
found on your vehicle
• side airbags located inside the
seat back of the driver and front
passenger seats
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator later in
this chapter.
The design and development of the side airbag system included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY姞 CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near
the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a
deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain
airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner.
50 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the
curtain airbags, its fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: All occupants of your vehicle including the driver
should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS
and curtain airbag is provided.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct or place
objects in the deployment path of the curtain airbag.
WARNING: If the curtain airbags have deployed, the curtain
airbags will not function again. The curtain airbags
(including the A, B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. If the curtain
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a collision.
The Safety Canopy will deploy during significant side collisions or when a
certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor.
The Safety Canopy is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal, behind
the headliner, above each row of seats. In certain lateral collisions or
rollover events, the Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless of which
seats are occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided
in side impact collisions and rollover events.
The system consists of the
following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags
fitted above the trim panels over
the front and rear side windows
identified by wording on the
B-pillar trim.
Supplementary Restraints System 51
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air
curtain deployment.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system with readiness
indicator. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator in this
chapter.
Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in
the rear seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety Canopy included
recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of
automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety
Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of
your vehicle (including frame, bumper, front end body structure
and tow hooks) may affect the performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of your
vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and occupant sensors which
provide information to the restraints control module which deploys
(activates) the front safety belt pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, seat mounted side airbags, and the Safety Canopy威. Based on the
type of accident (frontal impact, side impact or rollover) the restraints
control module will deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above
safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. The readiness of the
safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. See
Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required.
52 Supplementary Restraints System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
The safety belt pretensioners and the airbag supplemental restraint
system are designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal or
lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is
detected by the rollover sensor.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for
both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash severity, belt usage, etc.)
were not appropriate to activate these safety devices.
• Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near-frontal
collisions (not rollovers, side impacts or rear impacts) unless the
collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side collisions, and in rollovers.
• Side airbags are designed to inflate in side-impact collisions, not
rollovers, rear impacts, frontal or near-frontal collisions, unless the
collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration.
• The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact
collisions or rollover events, not in rear impact, frontal or near-frontal
collisions, unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or
rollover likelihood.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Airbags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
Supplementary Restraints System 53
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION ON RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry
Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. The term IC before the radio certification number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet
(10 meters). Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater
range. A decrease in operating range could be caused by:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around your vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by
other short distance radio transmissions (e.g. amateur radios, medical
equipment, wireless headphones, remote controls and alarm systems). If
the frequencies are jammed, you will not be able to use your remote
control. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure your vehicle is locked before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control will operate if you press
any button unintentionally.
54 Keys and Remote Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REMOTE CONTROL
Integrated Keyhead Transmitters
Your vehicle may be equipped with
two integrated keyhead
transmitters. The key blade is used
to start the vehicle and unlock or
lock the driver’s door from outside
the vehicle. The transmitter portion
functions as the remote control.
Note: Your vehicle’s keys were
issued with a security label that
provides important vehicle key cut
information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the
back surface of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the
vehicle. The transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032
or equivalent.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
1. Twist a thin coin in the slot near the key
ring to remove the battery cover (1).
2. Carefully peel up the rubber gasket (2)
from the transmitter if it does not come off
with the battery cover.
3. Remove the old battery (3).
3
2
1
Keys and Remote Control 55
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the instructions inside the integrated
keyhead transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the
battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery
housing cavity.
5. Reinstall the rubber gasket.
6. Snap the battery cover back onto the key.
Memory Feature
The feature allows the remote control to recall the driver seat, power
mirrors, steering column and power adjustable foot pedals memory
positions.
Press the unlock button on the remote control to recall the memory
positions. If the easy entry and exit feature is enabled, the seat will move
to the easy entry position. The seat will move to the driver memory
position when the key is put in the ignition.
Programming Memory to the Transmitter
1. Move the memory features to the desired positions using the
associated controls.
2. Press and hold memory button 1
(on the side of the driver’s seat) for
five seconds. A tone will sound after
about two seconds. Continue to hold
until a second tone is heard.
3. Within three seconds press the
lock button on the remote control.
4. Wait 10 seconds, then press the unlock button on the remote control.
Repeat this procedure for memory button 2 and a second remote control
if desired.
Deactivating Memory from the Transmitter
1. Press and hold the desired memory button for five seconds. A tone
will sound after about two seconds. Continue to hold until a second tone
is heard.
2. Within three seconds press the unlock button on the remote control.
Repeat this procedure for each additional transmitter if desired.
2
1
56 Keys and Remote Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Car Finder
Press the button twice within three seconds. The horn will
chirp and the turn signals will flash. It is recommended that
this method be used to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is off.
Press the button to activate the alarm. Press the button again
or turn the ignition on to deactivate.
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement or additional keys or remote controls can be purchased
from your authorized dealer. Your dealer can program the transmitters to
your vehicle or you may be able to program them yourself. See the
Security chapter for information on programming your transmitters.
Keys and Remote Control 57
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
MyKey威 allows you to program keys with restricted driving modes to
promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys programmed to the
vehicle can be activated with these restricted modes. Any keys that have
not been programmed are referred to as an administrator key or admin
key which can be used to:
• create a restricted key
• program optional MyKey settings
• clear all MyKey features altogether.
Once a key has been programmed, you can access the following
information using the information display control:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle.
• The total distance the vehicle has been driven with a MyKey.
For vehicles equipped with intelligent access (push button start), when
both a MyKey and an admin intelligent access key (fob) are present, the
admin fob will be recognized by the vehicle to start the engine.
Standard Settings
These settings cannot be changed.
• Belt-Minder. This cannot be disabled and the five–minute timer does
not expire. The audio system is muted when MyKey Belt-Minder is
activated.
• Early low fuel. Warnings are displayed in the information display
control followed by an audible tone when the estimated remaining fuel
in the tank will allow 75 miles (121 kilometers) of travel or less.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your vehicle, are forced on:
parking aid, blind spot information system (BLIS) with cross traffic
alert and the collision warning system.
Optional Settings
These settings can be configured right after a MyKey is first created or
changed afterward with an admin key.
• Vehicle speed limit of 80 mph (130 km/h). Visual warnings are
displayed followed by an audible tone when vehicle speed has reached
80 mph (130 km/h).
• Vehicle speed warning of 45, 55 or 65 mph (75, 90, or 105 km/h).
Visual warnings are displayed followed by an audible tone when the
preselected vehicle speed is exceeded.
58 MyKey
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%. A message in the audio
system is displayed when attempting to exceed the limited volume.
• AdvanceTrac. The system cannot be turned off when Always-on has
been set.
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display controls to create a MyKey.
1. Insert the key you want to program into the ignition or, if the vehicle
is equipped with push button start, put the Intelligent Access key in
the backup slot; see the Starting and Stopping the Engine chapter
for the backup slot location.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Press SETUP using the information display buttons until PRESS
RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed.
4. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
MYKEY will be displayed.
5. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS
AS RESTRICTED is displayed Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT
NEXT START is displayed.
The key is successfully programmed. Make sure you label it so you can
distinguish it from the admin keys.
To program optional settings for the key(s), see the
Programming/Changing Optional Settings chapter.
Programming/Changing Optional Settings
Note: All programmed keys can be cleared within the same key cycle in
which a key was programmed, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys. To clear all keys, see Clearing all MyKeys.
You can access the optional settings through the information display
controls.
1. Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETTINGS is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus.
3. Press the SETUP button to display the next menu to scroll through
your choices.
4. On any of the menus, press RESET to highlight your choice with the
<…>.
5. Press SETUP to enter your choice. The next optional setting will be
displayed.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional
settings.
MyKey 59
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
Note: All programmed MyKeys can be cleared within the same key cycle
in which a MyKey was created, otherwise an admin key is required to
clear the keys.
To clear all MyKeys (which removes all restrictions and returns them to
admin key status), use the information display controls to do the
following:
1. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM
CLEAR is displayed.
3. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL
MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM STATUS
The information display controls provide information about keys
programmed to the vehicle:
• MYKEY MILES: Tracks mileage when a MyKey is used. If mileage
does not accumulate as expected, then the MyKey is not being used
by the intended user. The only way to reset this to zero is by clearing
MyKeys. If the mileage is lower than the last time you checked, then
the key system has been recently reset.
• # MYKEY(S): Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the
vehicle. Can also be used to detect deletion of a MyKey.
• # ADMIN KEY(S): Indicates how many admin keys are programmed
to the vehicle. Can also be used to detect if an additional key has
been programmed to the vehicle.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE START SYSTEMS
MyKey is NOT compatible with non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote
start systems. If you choose to install a remote start system, please see
your Ford authorized dealer for a Ford-approved remote start system.
The following information MAY help customers who choose to use a
non-Ford-approved remote start system. The actions provided below do
NOT make MyKey compatible with non-Ford-approved remote start
system, but it MAY help you to retain some MyKey functions.
Vehicles Equipped with Traditional Keys
When using a non-Ford-approved remote start system, the default
settings may recognize the remote start system as an additional admin
key with its associated privileges. It is NOT compatible with MyKey.
Restart the engine when you insert a key into the ignition cylinder; it
may help you to retain some MyKey functions.
60 MyKey
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In addition to the key that has been programmed as a MyKey, owners of
vehicles equipped with traditional keys have the option to program the
non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey if the remote start
fob is used by the MyKey driver.
To program a non-Ford-approved remote start system as a MyKey, do the
following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a non-Ford approved remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-5 in the Creating a MyKey section.
Vehicles Equipped with Intelligent Access Key (Push Button Start)
Note: It is not possible to program the remote start system as a MyKey
on vehicles equipped with intelligent access key (push button start).
Therefore, you should treat the remote start fob as you would any other
admin key. When the vehicle is started using remote start, the system
will stall the engine when you either enter the vehicle or shift the vehicle
into gear. Prior to the engine stall, the vehicle will have administrative
privileges. When you restart the engine, the vehicle will identify the user
as an admin or MyKey driver depending on the settings of the actual key
used to start the vehicle.
Note: For all vehicles, the number of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey system
status menu, may include the non-Ford-approved remote start system as
an additional key in the total count. See the Checking System Status
section.
For all vehicles with a non-Ford-approved remote start installed, it is
possible to program all real keys as MyKeys, in which case, you will need
to use your remote start system to clear all MyKeys (which removes all
restrictions and returns them to admin key status) by doing the
following:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using your non-Ford-approved remote start
fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-3 in the Clearing all MyKeys section.
MyKey 61
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition Potential Causes
I cannot program a
key.
• The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• The key in the ignition is the only admin key
(there always has to be at least one admin
key).
• The intelligent access key is not in the
backup slot (vehicles with push button start).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start Systems chapter.
I cannot program the
optional settings.
• The key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No keys are programmed to the vehicle. See
the Creating a MyKey chapter.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start System chapter.
I cannot clear the
restricted keys.
• Key in the ignition does not have admin
privileges.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter.
• The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with
admin privileges. See the Using MyKey with
Remote Start System chapter.
I lost the only admin
key.
• Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost a key. • Program spare keys as outlined under
SecuriLock in the Security chapter.
62 MyKey
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Condition Potential Causes
I accidentally
programmed all keys
as restricted keys.
• The vehicle has a remote start system that
is recognized as an admin key. See the Using
MyKey with Remote Start System chapter to
reset all restricted keys using remote start.
No restricted key
functions with
intelligent access key
(push button start).
• An admin key is present at engine start-up.
• No restricted keys are programmed to the
vehicle. See the Creating a MyKey chapter.
Restricted key
programmed total
includes one additional
key.
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as a restricted key.
• The vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. See the Using MyKey with Remote
Start Systems chapter.
Admin keys
programmed total
includes one additional
key.
• An unknown key has been programmed to
the vehicle as an admin key.
• Vehicle is equipped with a remote start
system. See the Using MyKey with remote
start systems chapter.
MyKey miles do not
accumulate.
• The restricted key is not being used by the
intended user.
• The key system has been reset.
MyKey 63
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or the remote control to lock
and unlock the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is located on the driver and front passenger
door panels.
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Remote Control
The remote control can be used anytime the vehicle is not running.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
Press the button to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the button again within three seconds to unlock all doors.
The turn signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control
for four seconds to disable or enable two-stage unlocking. Disabling
two-stage unlocking allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of
the button. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the unlocking
mode was changed. The unlocking mode will be applied to the remote
control and keyless entry keypad.
Locking the Doors
Press the button to lock all the doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors
are closed. The doors will lock again, the horn will chirp and the turn
signals will illuminate if all the doors and the luggage compartment are
closed.
Note: If any door or the luggage compartment is not closed, or if the
hood is not closed on vehicles equipped with an anti-theft alarm or
remote start, the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash.
A B
64 Locks
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Power Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area
before using power liftgate control.
WARNING: Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust
fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or
other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Press twice within three seconds to open or close the liftgate,
or to reverse the movement.
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle
if your key is still in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the
vehicle with the power door lock control, all the doors will lock then
unlock if your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by:
• locking the driver’s door with a key
• using the lock control on the remote control
• using the keyless entry keypad.
If both front doors and the liftgate are closed, the vehicle can be locked
from any method, regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not.
Locks 65
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Autolock and Unlock
The autolock feature will lock all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate
window when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion, and
• the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the vehicle was autolocked, the autounlock feature will unlock all
doors when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of switching
the ignition off.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock
These features can be enabled or disabled:
• by your authorized dealer
• through the information display
• using the power door lock procedure.
To enable or disable using the power door locks, do the following:
Note: You will have 30 seconds to complete the procedure.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock button three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock button three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn will chirp indicating the programming
mode has been entered.
Autolock: Once in programming mode, press the power door unlock
button then the lock button. The horn will chirp once if autolock was
deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autolock was
activated.
Autounlock: Once in programming mode, press the power door lock
button then the unlock button. The horn will chirp once if autounlock
was deactivated or twice (one short and one long chirp) if autounlock
was activated.
6. Turn the ignition off. The horn will chirp once to confirm the
procedure is complete.
Note: The autounlock feature can be enabled or disabled independently
of the autolock feature.
66 Locks
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when the remote entry
system is used to unlock the door(s).
The system will turn off the lights if:
• the ignition is turned on
• the lock button on the remote control is pressed
• the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control (if equipped) must not be set to the off position
for the illuminated entry system to operate.
The lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control
• any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and parking lamps illuminate when doors are closed
and the key is removed from the ignition.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse
• the key is inserted in the ignition.
Battery Saver
If the courtesy lamps, dome lamps or headlamps are left on, the battery
saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned
off.
Locks 67
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LIFTGATE
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Power Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure that the liftgate is closed to prevent
exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. This will also
prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. If you must drive with
the liftgate door open, keep the vehicle well ventilated so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate
area before using the power liftgate control.
WARNING: Keep keys out of the reach of children. Do not allow
children to operate the power liftgate, or to play near to an open
or moving power liftgate.
Note: Cycling the ignition prior to completely latching the liftgate could
result in damage to the liftgate or its power components. Make sure the
liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle.
If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close cycle and the
liftgate is 6-10 inches (15-24 centimeters) from being latched, the liftgate
may reverse to the full open position. Verify that the liftgate is closed
before operating or moving the vehicle, especially in an enclosure, like a
garage or a parking structure. The liftgate or it components could be
damaged in an enclosure, if the liftgate is open.
When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32°F (0°C), the
liftgate may stop about 5 inches (13 centimeters) from the full open
position. The liftgate can be fully opened by pressing it upward to the
maximum open position.
68 Locks
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Opening and Closing the Power Liftgate
Note: The liftgate can be reversed with a second press on a control
button or transmitter and can be manually closed at any time.
The liftgate will only operate with your vehicle in P. The chime will beep
once if conditions are not correct to start an operation. These conditions
include:
• The ignition is in on and the transmission is not in P.
• The battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage.
• The vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after a open request, a fast
continuous chime indicates excessive load on the liftgate or a possible
strut failure. If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster
chime, have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer.
Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the
power system will permit. This will activate the obstacle detection
feature.
To open or close from the instrument panel:
Press the instrument panel button.
To open or close with the remote control:
Press the remote control button within three seconds.
To open with the outside liftgate
button (manual actuation):
1. Unlock the liftgate with the
remote entry transmitter or power
door unlock control.
2. Press the control button located
in the top of the liftgate pull cup
handle.
Note: Let the power system to
open the liftgate after releasing the
control button. Continued upward force after unlatching may activate the
obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation.
Note: If weight is added to the liftgate (bike rack, snow, etc.) it may
start a power close event immediately after a power open. If this
happens, a unique continuous chime will sound.
Locks 69
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To close with the rear cargo area button:
WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear
switch.
Note: The rear cargo area control button is disabled when the liftgate is
latched.
Press and release the control on the
left rear quarter panel. A chime will
beep once if conditions are not
correct to start an operation (i.e.,
the vehicle is out of park). In a
normal close, the chime will begin
just before the gate starts to move
and continue for a total of three
seconds.
To manually operate the liftgate:
Note: Manual operation is suggested on extreme inclines or in extreme
cold -40°F (-40°C).
Note: In the event of a power failure, the latch can be accessed and
released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim.
1. Disable the liftgate power function in the information display. See the
Information Displays chapter.
2. Push the control button located
in the top of the liftgate pull cup
handle to unlatch the liftgate, then
pull on the outside handle.
70 Locks
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Obstacle Detection
Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause it to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To prevent this, let the power
liftgate fully close before entering the vehicle.
The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature.
If the power liftgate is closing, the system is designed to reverse to full
open when it encounters a solid obstacle. A three second chime is also
sounded when an obstacle is detected. Once the obstacle is removed, the
liftgate can be closed under power.
If the power liftgate is opening, the system is designed to stop when it
encounters a solid obstacle. A chime will sound for three seconds while
the obstacle is present.
Resetting the Power Liftgate
If any of these conditions occur, the power liftgate may not operate and
must be reset:
• A low voltage or dead battery
• Disconnected battery
• The liftgate is manually closed and left ajar (unlatched)
To reset the power liftgate:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then, reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the liftgate.
3. Power open the liftgate by using the remote entry transmitter or
instrument panel button.
Note: If the power liftgate system is turned off in the message center,
the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear
cargo area control button. The system will need to be turned on to
resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area
control button. The power liftgate is still operational through the use of
the remote entry transmitter and instrument panel button when the
power liftgate is turned off in the message center.
Liftgate Ajar Signal
If the liftgate or liftgate glass are not fully latched, you will receive a
message on the instrument panel. If you see this message, check both
the liftgate glass and liftgate door to ensure they are fully latched.
Locks 71
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Liftgate Window
To open the liftgate window, press
the button in the center of the
liftgate above the license plate.
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
or release the liftgate glass without
using a key.
The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5-digit entry code; this
code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box and is
available from your authorized dealer. You can also create up to five of
your own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
You can store up to three personal entry codes.
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Press the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds. The doors will lock
and then unlock to confirm that the system is in programming mode.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. Press 1•2 on the keypad to save personal entry code 1.
The doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that your personal entry
code has been programmed.
To program additional personal entry codes, repeat Steps 1–3, then for
Step 4:
• press 3•4 to save personal entry code 2, or
• press 5•6, 7•8,or9•0 to save personal entry code 3.
72 Locks
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
Programming Memory to a Personal Entry Code
To program a personal entry code to recall a driver memory setting,
repeat Steps 1–4 above.
• Pressing 1•2 on the keypad in Step 4 will program the code to driver
memory setting 1.
• Pressing 3•4 in Step 4 will program the code to driver memory
setting 2.
Note: Pressing 5•6, 7•8,or9•0 keypad numbers in Step 4 will not
program the code to recall a driver memory setting.
Note: The factory-set code cannot be associated with a memory setting.
Erasing Personal Code
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release the 1•2 on the keypad within five seconds. The
doors will lock and then unlock to confirm that the system is in
programming mode.
3. Press and hold the 1•2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5-digit code
will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode if the wrong code has been
entered seven times (35 consecutive button presses). This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the remote control
• the ignition is turned on.
Locks 73
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Unlocking and Locking the Doors and Liftgate
To unlock the driver’s door: enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate.
To unlock all doors and liftgate: enter the factory set 5-digit code or
your personal code, then press the 3•4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors and liftgate: press the 7 •8 and the 9•0 at the
same time (with the driver’s door closed). You do not need to enter the
keypad code first.
To open the liftgate glass: enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code, then press the 5•6.
74 Locks
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SECURILOCK姞 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with non-Ford aftermarket remote
start systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices or a second coded key on the
same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues if they are too close to
the key when starting the engine. Prevent these objects from touching
the coded key while starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine
if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle. Always take
your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.
The system is an engine immobilization system. It is designed to help
prevent the engine from being started unless a coded key programmed
to your vehicle is used. Using the wrong key may prevent the engine
from starting. A message may appear in the information display.
If you are unable to start the engine with a correctly coded key, a
malfunction has happened and a message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition off.
Anti-Theft Indicator
The anti-theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is off, the indicator will flash once every
two seconds to indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning
as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is on, the indicator will glow for three seconds, then
turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is on. If this occurs, switch the
ignition off then back on to make sure there was no electronic
interference with the programmed key. If your vehicle does not start, try
to start it with the second programmed key and if successful contact
your authorized dealership for key replacement. If the indicator still
flashes rapidly or glows steadily, your vehicle will not start. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible for service.
Security 75
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key disarms the vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle may come equipped with two integrated keyhead
transmitters.
The integrated keyhead transmitter functions as a programmed ignition
key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle, as well as a remote
control.
If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys are
lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key, you will need to
have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. The key codes need to
be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to
help prevent any inconveniences. See your authorized dealer to purchase
additional spare or replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Key
Note: A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your
vehicle. Only four of these eight can be integrated keyhead transmitters.
You can program your own integrated keyhead transmitters or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This procedure will program both
the engine immobilizer key code and the remote entry portion of the
remote control to your vehicle.
Only use integrated keyhead transmitters or standard SecuriLock keys.
You must have two previously programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See your authorized dealer to have
the spare key programmed if two previously programmed coded keys are
not available.
Read and understand the entire procedure before you begin.
1. Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition.
4. After three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key into the ignition.
76 Security
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the ignition off and remove the second previously programmed
coded key from the ignition.
7. After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition off
and removing the previously programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
8. Turn the ignition from off to on. Keep the ignition on for at least six
seconds.
9. Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition.
The key will start the vehicle’s engine and will operate the remote entry
system (if the new key is an integrated keyhead transmitter) if it has
been successfully programmed. The theft indicator light will illuminate
for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming.
If the key was not successfully programmed, the theft indicator light may
flash on and off. Wait 20 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key programmed
if you are still unsuccessful.
Wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 to program
an additional key.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of unauthorized entry to your vehicle.
The turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound when:
• any door or the hood is opened without using the key or the remote
control
• the ignition is turned on with an invalid key.
Take all keys and remote controls to your authorized dealer if there is
any potential alarm problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The system is ready to arm whenever the ignition is off. Lock the vehicle
to arm the alarm.
The turn signal lamps will flash once after locking the vehicle to indicate
the alarm is in the pre-armed mode and will become fully armed in
20 seconds.
Security 77
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disarming the Alarm
To disarm the alarm, do any of the following:
• Press the power door unlock button within the 20-second pre-armed
mode.
• Press the unlock button on the remote control.
• Unlock the doors with the keyless entry pad.
• Turn the ignition on with a valid key.
• Press the panic button on the remote control. The alarm system will
still be armed, but this shuts off the horn and turn lamps when the
alarm is sounding.
Note: If the driver’s door is unlocked with a key, a chime will sound
when you open the door. You will have 12 seconds to disarm the alarm
using any of the actions above, otherwise the alarm will trigger.
78 Security
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle
is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Refer to
Sitting in the Correct Position in the Seats chapter.
Use the control on the side of the
steering column to tilt the position.
Memory Feature
The steering column positions are saved and recalled with the memory
feature. Refer to the Seats chapter.
Pressing the adjustment control during memory recall will cancel the
operation. The column will respond to the adjustment control.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column will move to the full up position when the ignition is
switched off. It will return to the previous position when the ignition is
switched on. This feature can be switched on or off in the information
display.
TILT
Steering Wheel 79
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUDIO CONTROL
A. Volume up
B. Seek up or next
C. Volume down
D. Seek down or previous
E. Media
Media
Press the media button repeatedly to scroll through available audio
modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset
• play the next or previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band
• seek through a track.
M
EDIA
- VO
L +
OK
E
D
B
A
C
80 Steering Wheel
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
A. Voice recognition
B. Phone mode
C. Confirm selection
See the SYNC or Navigation
System chapter.
CRUISE CONTROL
See the Cruise Control chapter.
M
EDIA
- VOL +
OK
A
B
C
RESUME
S
E
T
+
OFF ON
S
E
T
-
Steering Wheel 81
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with
feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
The control is located on the left side of the steering column. Press and
hold the appropriate control to move the pedals.
A. Farther
B. Closer
The pedal positions are saved and recalled with the memory feature (if
equipped). Refer to the Seats chapter.
The pedals should only be adjusted when the vehicle is parked.
A
B
82 Pedals
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before turning on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are turned off before entering a
car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks
or smears. If that does not resolve the issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to bun out.
Always use the windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Rotate the end of the control:
• away from you to increase the
wiper speed
• toward you to decrease the wiper
speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the interval between wipes will
decrease when intermittent wipe is selected.
RAIN-SENSING WIPERS
Note: Wet road conditions may result in inconsistent or unexpected
wiping or smearing. Lower the sensitivity, switch to normal or high-speed
wiping or turn the wipers off to reduce smearing.
Note: Turn off the wipers before entering a car wash.
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity to one of the interval
moisture settings. The wipers will
not cycle until moisture is detected
on the windshield. The wiper speed
will vary based on the amount of
moisture detected on the windshield
and the sensitivity setting. The
wipers will continue to wipe as long as moisture is detected.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean, especially the area around the
interior mirror where the sensor is located, or sensor performance may
be affected.
1
2
1
2
Wipers and Washers 83
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. This may scratch
the glass, damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out.
Always use the windshield washer before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty.
This may cause the washer pump to overheat.
Press the end of the stalk to
activate the washer.
• A brief press causes a single wipe without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold will activate the wipers and washer fluid for up
to 10 seconds.
A wipe will occur a few seconds after washing to clear any remaining
washer fluid.
REAR-WINDOW WIPER AND WASHERS
Rotate the control to select:
2 — Intermittent operation
(shortest pause between wipes).
1 — Intermittent operation (longest
pause between wipes).
0 — Off.
Rotate and hold the control to either the top or bottom position to
activate the rear washer. The control will return to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
1
2
1
2
84 Wipers and Washers
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LIGHTING CONTROL
Rotate the control clockwise to the
first position to turn on the parking
lamps.
Rotate the control clockwise to the
second position to turn on the
headlamps.
Rotate the control to the vertical
position to turn the headlamps off.
High Beams
• Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate.
• Pull the lever toward you to
deactivate.
Headlamp Flasher
Pull the lever toward you slightly
and release it to flash the
headlamps.
1
2
0
1
2
0
Lighting 85
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOLAMPS
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on/off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately
20 seconds or, if equipped with a
message center, you can select a
delay from 0–180 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned off. See
Message center in the Instrument
Cluster chapter.
• To turn autolamps on, rotate the control counterclockwise one
position.
• To turn autolamps off, rotate the control to the off position.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel when exterior
lights are on.
• Rotate the control from left to
right to brighten the instrument
panel.
• Rotate the control from right to
left to dim the instrument panel.
• Rotate the control fully to the right (past detent) to turn on interior
lamps.
• Rotate the control to the left position (past detent) to turn off the
interior lamps and to disable the illuminated entry feature. When the
control is in the far left position, it acts as a dome lamp
defeat/override.
Note: If the battery is disconnected, discharged, or a new battery is
installed, the instrument lighting dimmer requires re-calibration. Rotate
the control from the full dim position to the full dome/on position to
reset. This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting
conditions.
86 Lighting
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Always remember to turn on your headlamps at
dusk or during inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp
(DRL) system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not
provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate
your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
Turns the fog lamps on at full intensity output. To activate:
• the ignition must be in the on position and
• the headlamp control must be in the off, parking lamps or autolamp
position.
FRONT FOG LAMPS
The control also operates the fog
lamps. The fog lamps can be turned
on when the control is in the
parking lamps on, headlamps on, or
autolamps positions and the high
beams are not turned on.
Pull the control towards you to turn
the fog lamps on. The fog lamp
indicator light will illuminate.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
1
2
0
Lighting 87
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INTERIOR LAMPS
Front Row Map Lamps
To turn on the map lamps, press the
outer edge of the clear lens. The
front row map lamp lights when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the courtesy
lamps come on.
• the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
Second Row Map Lamps
The second row map lamps are
located in the headliner above the
second row seats.
The second row map lamp lights
when:
• any door is opened,
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on, and
• any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is off.
Press the controls to activate the lamps.
88 Lighting
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Rear Cargo Lamp
The rear cargo lamp lights when:
• any door is opened, and the
switch is in the middle position.
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is rotated until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and ignition is off
(and switch is in the middle
position).
With the ignition key in the accessory or on position, the rear cargo lamp
can be turned on or off by sliding the control.
Battery saver
The battery saver will shut off the exterior lamps and interior lamps,
except the hazard warning lamps if activated, 10 minutes after the
ignition control has been turned off. The system will not turn off the
parking lamps if the lighting control is in the parking lamps on position.
Lighting 89
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let them play with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power windows, you should verify
they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window openings.
Note: You may hear a rumbling noise when one or both of the rear
windows are open. Lower a front window slightly to reduce this noise.
Press the switch to open the
window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down (If Equipped)
Press the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the
window.
One-Touch Up (If Equipped)
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or lift it again to stop the
window.
Bounce-Back (If Equipped)
The window will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
Pull up the window switch and hold within two seconds of the window
reaching the bounce-back position. The window will travel up with no
bounce-back protection. The window will stop if the switch is released
before the window is fully closed.
AUTO
AUTO
90 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Window Lock
A. Unlock
B. Lock
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several minutes after you switch
the ignition off, or until either front door is opened.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in
motion.
A. Left-hand mirror
B. Off
C. Right-hand mirror
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
2. Move the control in the direction you want to tilt the mirror.
3. Return the control to the center position to lock mirrors in place.
Power-Folding Mirrors
Note: Activating the mirrors 10 or more times within one minute, or
repeated folding and unfolding of the mirrors while holding the control
down during full travel, may disable the system to protect motors from
overheating. Wait approximately three minutes with the vehicle running,
and up to 10 minutes with the vehicle off, for the system to reset and for
function to return to normal.
A
B
B
A
C
Windows and Mirrors 91
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Pull the control back to fold the
mirrors in or out.
A mirror may also be manually folded by pulling it toward the door
window glass. This may cause the mirror to appear loose and it will need
to be re-synchronized. Pull and hold the control to fold the mirrors in
until movement stops. A click will be heard indicating re-synchronization.
If the click is not heard, use the control to fold the mirrors all the way
out, then in again. Once the click is heard te mirrors will operate
normally until they are again manually folded.
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions through the memory
function. See Memory function in the Seats chapter.
Auto-Dimming Feature
The driver’s side exterior mirror will automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The rear-facing portion of the appropriate mirror housing will blink when
the turn signal is activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot mirror are closer than they
appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex mirror built into the upper
outboard corner of the exterior mirrors. They are designed to assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane change, then check the blind
spot mirror. If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the
traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.
92 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The image of the approaching
vehicle is small and near the inboard
edge of the main mirror when it is at
a distance. The image becomes
larger and begins to move outboard
across the main mirror as the vehicle
approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and
begin to appear in the blind spot
mirror as the vehicle approaches
(B). The vehicle will transition to
your peripheral field of view as it
leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum or ammonia based cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Some mirrors also
have a second pivot point. This lets you move the mirror head up or
down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the mirror.
Mirror performance may be affected. A rear center passenger or raised
rear center head restraint may also block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce glare when bright lights are
detected from behind your vehicle. It will automatically return to normal
reflection when you select reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
A
B
C
Windows and Mirrors 93
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHILDMINDER MIRROR (IF EQUIPPED)
On double bin overhead consoles, the conversation mirror allows the
driver to view the rear seating area.
WARNING: Do not use the childminder mirror to view rearward
traffic, do not allow rear passengers to distract you from the
driving task, and make sure the rear view mirror has a clear view of
rearward traffic. Failure to do so could increase the risk of a crash from
an unseen vehicle, which may result in serious injury.
Press the release area on the rear
edge of the bin door to open the
childminder mirror. The door will
open to full open position.
The rear view mirror may have to
be adjusted to its lower arm
position to prevent interference
when the childminder mirror is
extended down.
REAR QUARTER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children play with the power rear quarter windows.
They may seriously injure themselves.
WARNING: When closing the power rear quarter windows, you
should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in the proximity of the window opening.
Press and hold the VENT control to
open the windows.
Pull and hold the VENT control to
close the windows.
Note: Vehicles without a moonroof will only have the VENT button.
SLIDETILT
VENT
94 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SUN VISORS
Rotate the visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for
extra sunlight coverage.
Illuminated Visor Vanity Mirror
Lift the cover to switch on the
lamp.
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Do not let children play with the moonroof or leave
children unattended in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNING: When closing the moonroof, you should verify that it
is free of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are
not in the proximity of the moonroof opening.
The sliding shade can be manually opened or closed when the moonroof
is closed. Pull the shade toward the front of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof control is located on the overhead console.
The moonroof has a one-touch open and close feature. To stop its motion
during the one-touch operation, press the control a second time.
Windows and Mirrors 95
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The moonroof will
stop short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce
rumbling wind noise which may happen
with the moonroof fully open. Press and
release the control again to fully open the
moonroof.
Pull and release the SLIDE control to
close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically while closing and reverse some
distance if there is an obstacle detected.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two seconds of a bounce-back
event to override the function. While bounce-back is active, the closing
force increases for each of the next three times the moonroof is closed.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to move the moonroof to the vent
position. Pull and hold the TILT control to close the moonroof.
96 Windows and Mirrors
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GAUGES
Cluster shown in standard measure. Metric similar.
A. Battery voltage gauge
B. Fuel gauge
C. Engine coolant temperature gauge
D. Engine oil pressure gauge
E. Speedometer
F. Information display. See Information displays for more information.
G. Tachometer
Battery Voltage Gauge
Indicates the battery voltage when the ignition is in the on position. If
the pointer moves and stays outside the normal operating range, have
the vehicle’s electrical system checked by your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
A B C D
EFG
Instrument Cluster 97
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuel Gauge
Indicates approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank (when the
ignition is on). The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in
motion or on a grade. The fuel icon and arrow indicates which side of
the vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At normal operating temperature,
the level indicator will be in the normal range. If the engine coolant
temperature exceeds the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine and let the engine cool.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine oil pressure. The needle should stay in the normal
operating range. If the needle falls below the normal range, stop the
vehicle, turn off the engine and check the engine oil level. Add oil if
needed. If the oil level is correct, have your vehicle checked at your
authorized dealer.
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the
accumulated distance your vehicle has travelled.
Trip Computer
See Trip A/B in Information Displays.
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See Information Displays.
98 Instrument Cluster
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some lamps will illuminate when you
start your vehicle to make sure they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective system warning lamp for
further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in the information display and
function the same as a warning lamp but do not display when you start
your vehicle.
Airbag – Front
If it fails to illuminate on startup, continues to flash or remains
on, it indicates a malfunction. Have the system checked by your
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when there is a
malfunction in the indicator light.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to have the normal braking
system (without ABS) unless the brake warning lamp is also
illuminated. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical equipment and have the system
checked by your authorized dealer
Brake System
It will illuminate when the parking brake is engaged and the
ignition is on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check that the parking
brake is not engaged. If the parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by your authorized dealer.
WARNING: Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning
light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle.
Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Instrument Cluster 99
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Charging System
It will illuminate when the 12–volt battery is not charging
properly. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related
component.
Check 4X4
Displays with the message CHECK 4X4 when a four-wheel drive
fault is present. Refer to the Information Displays chapter for
more information.
Cruise Control
It will illuminate when you switch this feature on.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard
warning flasher is switched on. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb.
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine running or when you are
driving, this indicates a malfunction. Stop your vehicle as soon
as it is safe to do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level.
Note: Do not resume your journey if it illuminates despite the level
being correct. Have the system checked by your authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible, switch off the engine and let
cool.
100 Instrument Cluster
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fasten Safety belt
It will illuminate and a chime will sound to remind you to fasten
your safety belt.
High Beam
It will illuminate when the headlamp high beam is switched on.
It will flash when you use the headlamp flasher.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level is low or near empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine running or when driving, check
your tire pressure as soon as possible.
The lamp also illuminates momentarily when you switch the ignition on
to confirm the lamp is functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at any time, have the system
checked by your authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
It will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power
Illuminates when a powertrain fault has been detected. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Security/Anti-Theft System
Flashes when the SecuriLock威 passive anti-theft system has
been activated.
Instrument Cluster 101
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Service Engine Soon
The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing. Normally, the “service engine soon”
light will stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn itself off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after 15 seconds the “service
engine soon” light blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for I/M testing. See the Readiness for inspection/maintenance
(I/M) testing in the Fuel and Refueling chapter.
Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On-board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter. If
the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could damage your
catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration
and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately by your
authorized dealer.
WARNING: Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
Stability Control System
Displays when the AdvanceTrac威/Traction control is active. If
the light remains on, have the system serviced immediately.
Stability Control System Off
Illuminates when AdvanceTrac威/Traction control has been
disabled by the driver.
Transmission Tow/Haul
Illuminates when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated.
Refer to the Transmission chapter for transmission function
and operation. If the light flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately, damage to the transmission could occur.
102 Instrument Cluster
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4X4
Illuminates when four-wheel drive high is engaged. If the light
fails to display when the ignition is turned on, or remains on,
have the system serviced immediately by your authorized
dealer.
4X4 AUTO
Displays when using the 4x4 system.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
Key In Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory
position and the driver’s door is opened.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on, the ignition is off
(the key is not in the ignition) and the driver’s door is opened.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle.
If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking
brake, have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately.
Turn Signal Chime
Sounds when the direction indicator has been activated to signal a turn
and not turned off after the vehicle is driven more than 1.5 miles
(2.4 km).
Instrument Cluster 103
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and that you comply with all applicable
laws.
Various systems on your vehicle can be controlled using the information
display controls on the steering wheel. Corresponding information is
displayed in the information display.
Information Display Controls
• Press the INFO button to scroll
through trip, fuel usage, and
MyKey威 information.
• Press the SETUP button to scroll
through various vehicle feature
settings.
• Press the RESET button to choose settings, reset information and
confirm messages.
Info
Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following
features:
Note: Some options may appear slightly different or not at all if the
items are optional.
INFO
TRIP A/B
MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed)
MILES (km) TO E
AVG MPG (L/100km)
INFO
SETUP
RESET
104 Information Displays
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFO
MPG (L/km)
TBC GAIN = XX.X (if equipped)
TIMER
• TRIP A/B: Registers the distance of individual journeys. Press and
release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display (this
represents the trip mode). Press the RESET button to reset. Refer to
UNITS later in this section to switch the display from metric to
English.
• MYKEY MILES (km) (if programmed): For more information, refer to
the MyKey威 chapter.
• MILES (km) TO E: This displays an estimate of approximately how far
you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal
driving conditions. Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling
to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel. Distance to
empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is
based on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value
is not the same as the average fuel economy display. The running
average fuel economy is re-initialized to a factory default value if the
battery is disconnected.
• AVG MPG (L/100km): Average fuel economy displays your average fuel
economy in miles/gallon or liters/100 km.
• MPG (L/km): This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph.
Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy.
Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset.
• TBC GAIN (if equipped): Displays the level of trailer brake gain or if
the trailer is not connected.
• TIMER: Displays the trip elapsed drive time. Press and release RESET
to pause the timer. Press and hold RESET to reset the timer.
Information Displays 105
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Check and Vehicle Feature Customization
Press the SETUP button repeatedly
to cycle the message center through
the following features:
SETUP
RESET FOR
SYSTEM CHECK
press the RESET
button
OIL LIFE
CHARGING SYSTEM
WASHER FLUID LEVEL
DOOR AJAR STATUS
LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR
STATUS
BRAKE SYSTEM
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM
(if equipped)
MYKEY MILES
(if programmed)
MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED
ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED
MILES TO EMPTY
TBC GAIN = XX.X
(if equipped)
OIL LIFE
INFO
SETUP
RESET
106 Information Displays
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SETUP
UNITS press the RESET
button
English or Metric
AUTOLAMP (SEC) 0 to 180 seconds
AUTOLOCK On or Off
AUTOUNLOCK On or Off
RUNNING BOARDS
(if equipped)
Auto / Out / Off
POWER LIFTGATE
(if equipped)
On or Off
EASY ENTRY /
EXIT
On or Off
AIR SUSPENSION
(if equipped)
On or Off
REAR PARK AID
(if equipped)
On or Off
FRONT PARK AID
(if equipped)
Disable/Enable
TRAILER SWAY
(if equipped)
On or Off
TBC MODE
(if equipped)
CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY
COMPASS
ENGLISH /
FRENCH /
SPANISH RESET
FOR NEW
press the RESET
button
English / Spanish / French
(press and hold to set)
• RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK: The message center will begin to cycle
through the vehicle systems and provide a status of the item if
needed. Some systems show a message only if a condition is present.
• OIL LIFE: This displays the remaining oil life. An oil change is
required whenever indicated by the message center and according to
the recommended maintenance schedule. USE ONLY
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS.
Information Displays 107
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change,
perform the following:
1. Press and release the SETUP button to display “OIL LIFE XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW”.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds and release to reset
the oil life to 100%.
Note: To change oil life 100% value (if equipped with this feature) to
another value, proceed to Step 3.
3. Once “OIL LIFE SET TO XXX%” is displayed, release and press the
RESET button to change the Oil Life Start Value. Each release and press
will reduce the value by 10%.
• UNITS: Displays the current units in English or Metric.
• AUTOLAMP (SEC): This feature keeps your headlights on for up to
three minutes after the ignition is switched off.
• AUTOLOCK: This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when
the vehicle is shifted into any gear, putting the vehicle in motion.
• AUTOUNLOCK: This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors
when the driver’s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition
being turned off.
• RUNNING BOARDS (if equipped): This feature automatically deploys
the side running boards for easy entry/exit from the vehicle or for
cleaning.
Auto: The running boards will automatically deploy when a door is
opened and automatically retract when the door is closed
Out: The running boards will remain deployed regardless of the doors
being open/closed. This setting can be used when washing the vehicle,
or accessing the roof rack. The running boards will stow and enter
AUTO mode when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Off: The running boards will remain in regardless of the doors being
open/closed.
• POWER LIFTGATE (if equipped): This feature allows users to
open/close the rear liftgate at the touch of a button. If disabled, the
outside release handle and the rear cargo area control button are off.
The instrument panel button will continue to function the liftgate in
power mode.
• EASY ENTRY / EXIT: This feature automatically moves the driver’s
seat rearward and adjusts the steering column for easy exit/entry from
the vehicle.
108 Information Displays
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• AIR SUSPENSION (if equipped): Before disabling the air suspension,
make sure the liftgate and liftgate glass are in the closed position.
• REAR PARK AID (if equipped): This feature sounds a tone to warn
the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper, and functions only when
R (Reverse) gear is selected.
• FRONT PARK AID (if equipped): This feature sounds a warning tone
to warn the driver of obstacles near the front bumper.
• TRAILER SWAY (if equipped): This feature uses the electronic
stability control to mitigate trailer sway.
• TBC MODE (if equipped): Allows you to choose the trailer brake
mode.
• CREATE MYKEY / MYKEY SETUP / CLEAR MYKEY: For more
information refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
• COMPASS: Displays the vehicle’s heading direction.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in, on or near the vehicle may also affect
compass accuracy. If the compass appears to be inaccurate, a manual
calibration may be necessary. Refer to Compass zone adjustment
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press SETUP to reach the reset
for zone setting screen.
4. Press and hold RESET until the
message center display prompts you
to reset the current zone setting.
Press RESET.
5. Press and release RESET until the message center display changes to
show the current zone setting (XX).
6. Press and release the RESET button repeatedly until the correct zone
setting for your geographic location is displayed on the message center.
7. Press and release SETUP and allow the setup timer to expire to exit
the procedure or press INFO to exit.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
Information Displays 109
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Compass calibration adjustment
Note: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away
from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential
electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater, A/C, map lamps,
wiper, etc.) and make sure all the doors are closed
Note: If the RESET button is pressed or three minutes has expired, the
display will go back to the INFO menu and will show CAL instead of the
compass heading until the compass is calibrated.
1. Press RESET to start the compass calibration function.
2. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until
the CIRCLE SLOWLY TO CALIBRATE display changes to CALIBRATION
COMPLETED. It will take up to five circles to complete calibration.
3. The compass is now calibrated.
• ENGLISH / FRENCH / SPANISH RESET FOR NEW: Allows you to
choose which language the message center will display in.
Press RESET to cycle through each of the language choices.
Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle, not
all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be
abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have.
Press the RESET button for Type 1 displays or the OK button for Type 2
displays to acknowledge and remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will be removed automatically after
a short time. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can
access the menus.
AdvanceTrac威 /
Traction Control
Messages
Action / Description
SERVICE
ADVANCETRAC
Displayed when the AdvanceTrac威 system has
detected a condition that requires service.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
110 Information Displays
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Battery and
Charging System
Messages
Action / Description
CHECK CHARGING
SYSTEM
Displayed when the charging system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Brake System
Messages
Action / Description
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL LOW
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the
brake system should be inspected immediately.
Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance
chapter.
CHECK BRAKE
SYSTEM
Displayed when the brake system needs
servicing. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
PARK BRAKE
ENGAGED
Displayed when the parking brake is set and
the vehicle is in motion.
Door Messages Action / Description
DOOR AJAR
Displayed when a door is not completely
closed.
LIFTGATE / GLASS
AJAR
Displayed when the liftgate or liftgate glass is
not completely closed.
Fuel Messages Action / Description
CHECK FUEL FILL
INLET
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be
properly closed.
XXX MILES TO E
FUEL LEVEL LOW
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel
condition.
Information Displays 111
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance
Messages
Action / Description
ENGINE OIL
CHANGE SOON
Displayed when the engine oil life is nearing
its end.
OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%.
WASHER FLUID
LEVEL LOW
Indicates the washer fluid reservoir is less than
one quarter full. Check the washer fluid level.
MyKey威 Messages Action / Description
MYKEY ACTIVE
DRIVE SAFELY
Displayed when MyKey威 is active.
VEHICLE NEAR
TOP SPEED
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
VEHICLE AT TOP
SPEED - MYKEY
SETTING
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
TOP SPEED MYKEY
SETTING
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed
is 80 mph (130 km/h).
SPEED LIMITED TO
80 MPH
Displayed when starting the vehicle and
MyKey威 is in use and the MyKey speed limit is
on.
VEHICLE SPEED
80 MPH MAX
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and
the vehicle speed is 80 mph (130 km/h).
CHECK SPEED
DRIVE SAFELY
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and the
optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds
a preselected speed.
BUCKLE UP TO
UNMUTE AUDIO
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use and
Belt-Minder威 is activated.
112 Information Displays
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MyKey威 Messages Action / Description
KEY COULD NOT
PROGRAM
Displayed when an attempt is made to
program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.
ADVTRAC ON
MYKEY SETTING
Displayed when a MyKey威 is in use when
trying to disable the AdvanceTrac威 system and
the optional setting is on.
Park Aid Messages Action / Description
CHECK PARK AID
Displayed when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Suspension
Messages
Action / Description
AIR SUSPENSION
OFF
Displayed when the air suspension is off.
CHECK AIR
SUSPENSION
Displayed when the air suspension system is
not operating properly. If this message is
displayed while driving, pull off the road as
soon as safely possible.
Tire Messages Action / Description
LOW TIRE
PRESSURE
Displays when one or more tires on your
vehicle have low tire pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITOR FAULT
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring
system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays
on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE
SENSOR FAULT
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is
malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use.
For more information on how the system
operates under these conditions. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Information Displays 113
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Trailer Messages Action / Description
TRAILER SWAY
REDUCE SPEED
Displayed when the trailer sway control has
detected trailer sway.
4WD Messages Action / Description
4X4 SHIFT IN
PROGRESS
Displayed when the 4X4 system is making a
shift.
CLOCK
Press A to move the time display
backwards.
Press B to move the time display
forwards.
A B
LINCOLN
114 Information Displays
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM: 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM: 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio reception factors
Distance/Strength The further you travel from an FM station,
the weaker the signal and the weaker the
reception.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station Overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and result in the audio
system muting.
CD/CD Player Information
Note: CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 inch (12
centimeter) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not function
correctly when used in Ford CD players.
Note:
CDs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the CD to become
jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with
permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels. Ballpoint pens may
damage CDs. Please contact your authorized dealer for further information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped discs or discs with a scratch
protection film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only. Clean the disc with an approved
CD cleaner only, wiping from the center of the disc toward the edge. Do
not clean in a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended
periods of time.
Audio System 115
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and playing MP3 individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback: MP3 track
mode (system default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc. The
player numbers each MP3 track on the disc (noted by the .mp3 file
extension) from T001 to a maximum of T255. Note: The maximum
number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure
of the CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all MP3 tracks on the disc (noted
by the .mp3 file extension) and all folders containing MP3 files, from
F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of folders helps with navigation
through the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it is important to understand
how the system reads the structures you create. While various files may
be present, (files with extensions other than mp3), only files with the
.mp3 extension are played; other files are ignored by the system. This
enables you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays the structure as if it were
only one level deep (all .mp3 files are played, regardless of being in a
specific folder). In folder mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files in
the current folder.
116 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AM/FM/CD WITH SYNC姞
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
A. Memory presets:
• In radio mode, store your favorite stations for later access. When
tuned to any station, press and hold a preset button until sound
returns.
• In satellite radio mode, store up to six stations on each satellite band
(SAT1, SAT2 and SAT3).
B. Eject:
• Eject the current CD.
• To eject a specific CD, press the button, then the corresponding
memory preset button.
• Press and hold the eject the button to eject all CDs.
M L
R
P
O
N
Q
K J
I
H G F
B
A
C
D
E
1
LOAD
VOL
PUSH
AUX
CD
AM/FM
SHUFFLE
REV
FWD
OK
SEEK
MENU
TUNE
SEEK
TEXT
SCAN
23456
Audio System 117
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
C. Tune/Phone:
• In radio mode, turn to manually search the frequency band.
• In MP3 mode, turn to go to the next or previous folder (when folder
mode is active).
• In satellite radio mode, press the SEEK buttons to tune to the next
or previous channel.
• In category mode, turn to scroll through the list of available satellite
radio channel categories.
• In phone mode, press to access the phone features of the SYNC
system. See the SYNC威 chapter for more information.
D. MENU: Access audio system functions, such as sound settings for
Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade.
• If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio, you can access
different menus by pressing OK and the up and down arrow buttons
(E) to make selections.
• RBDS displays text transmitted by certain radio stations and to
search for music categories. To search for music categories, switch on
RBDS, press the up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
categories, then use the SEEK or SCAN buttons to begin the search.
• Set the strongest stations on the radio frequency by pressing MENU
until AUTOSET appears. AUTOSET does not override your original
presets. Use the up and down arrow buttons to switch on and off.
• SPEEDVOL (speed compensated volume) allows you to adjust radio
volume to compensate for noise levels when vehicle speed increases.
• Occupancy mode allows you to select and optimize sound for all
seating positions, driver seat or front seats. Use the up and down
arrow buttons to switch on and off.
• COMPRESS (compression) is only available in CD mode. Use the up
and down arrow buttons to switch it on and off. Switching
compression on brings the soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.
• Family entertainment options (if equipped) are also available when
scrolling through MENU options.
E. Up and down arrow buttons: Make selections in MENU mode.
F. Play/Pause/OK:
• Play/Pause allows you to play or pause a track when listening to a
CD.
• OK allows you to confirm commands with phone and media features
of the SYNC system. See the SYNC威 chapter for more information.
118 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
G. SEEK:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press the SEEK button.
The system stops at the next station up the band.
• In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the next track or press and hold to
advance within the same track.
H. FWD: Manually fast forward in a CD track or MP3 file.
I. TEXT/SCAN:
• In radio and CD/MP3 mode, press and hold to hear a brief sampling
of radio stations, CD tracks or MP3 files.
• In CD/MP3 mode, press and release to display track title, artist name
and disc title.
Note: In text mode, sometimes the display requires additional text to be
displayed. When the > or < indicator is present, press the SEEK arrows
to view the additional text.
J. REV: Manually rewind in a CD track or MP3 file.
K. SEEK:
• In radio mode, select a frequency band and press the SEEK button.
The system stops at the previous station down the band.
• In CD/MP3 mode, press to select the previous track or press and hold
to advance within the same track.
L. SHUFFLE: Play music on the selected CD or MP3 folder in random
order.
M. AM/FM: Select a frequency band.
N. CD: Enter CD/MP3 mode.
O. AUX: Access the media features of the SYNC system. See the SYNC威
chapter for more information.
P. VOL-PUSH: Press the power control to turn the system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
Q. CD slot: Insert a CD.
R. LOAD: Load a CD.
• Press LOAD and a memory preset button to load a CD to a specific
slot.
• Press and hold to autoload up to six CDs. The last disc inserted
automatically plays.
Audio System 119
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR AUDIO CONTROLS
Your vehicle is equipped with rear seat audio controls. This allows front
and middle seat passengers to listen to different media sources (radio,
CD, SYNC or DVD) simultaneously.
Note: The front and middle seat passengers cannot listen to two
different radio stations at the same time.
A. Headphone/Speaker Press to turn the rear speakers on (Single Play
mode) or off (Dual Play mode).
B. MEDIA Push to scroll through available playing medias, such as AM,
FM1, FM2, CD, SAT1, SAT2, SAT3 (if equipped with satellite radio), DVD
(if equipped) and SYNC威 (if equipped).
• If in Dual Play mode, SHARED illuminates in the audio display when
the front and rear modes are set to the same media.
• If SYNC is selected, press + or – to scroll through the different
options: SYNC USB, SYNC BTST and SYNC LINE. For more
information on SYNC, see the SYNC威 chapter.
C. Right arrow button
• In radio mode, press and release to scroll through memory presets.
Press and hold to seek to the next station.
• In CD and SYNC mode, press and release to go to the next track.
Press and hold to fast forward within that track.
D. Wired headphone jack
MEDIA
VOLUME
B
H FG E D CI
A
J
120 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
E. Left arrow button
• In radio mode, press and release to scroll through memory presets.
Press and hold to seek to the previous station.
• In CD or SYNC mode, press and release to advance to the previous
track. Press and hold to rewind within that track.
F. Auxiliary audio input jacks: Plug in and play auxiliary audio
sources.
G. VOLUME Press the up and down arrow buttons to increase or
decrease the headphone volume level. From the rear seat controls,
volume control cannot be set higher than the current audio setting
unless the speakers are turned off.
H. Wired headphone jack
I. - Press to access the previous CD.
J. + Press to access the next CD.
Activating the Rear Audio Controls
After the ignition has been turned on, FULL rear controls are active and
the system is in Single Play mode.
Parental Control
The multimedia system allows for three varying levels of parental control.
By simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 memory preset buttons, the rear
passengers may be allowed to access FULL or LOCAL control or be
LOCKED out of rear seat controls altogether.
1. Press the 3 and 5 memory preset buttons at the same time. LOCAL
illuminates in both front and rear audio displays, indicating that only
LOCAL rear control is available. Note: While in Single Play mode,
LOCAL is the same as LOCKED. In Dual Play mode, LOCAL allows
control of media which the driver has selected at the radio, or over
media played through the rear auxiliary input jacks.
2. Press the 3 and 5 buttons a second time and the rear control is
LOCKED. The rear passengers are restricted from control over media
of any kind (the rear controls are disabled). Note: If in Dual Play
mode, the headphone icon normally illuminated in the audio display
when in Dual Play turns off in the audio display.
3. Press the 3 and 5 buttons a third time and full control will be
restored to the rear seat controls. Switching the ignition off and then
on again has the same effect.
Audio System 121
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Switching Dual Play Mode On
Dual Play mode can be switched on by simultaneously pressing the 2 and
4 memory preset buttons on the audio or by doing the following:
1. Press the headphone/speaker control. The headphone icon
illuminates in both front and rear audio displays indicating the rear
seat speakers have been disabled and headphones are now active.
2. Press MEDIA to change audio sources (as heard in the headphones
only).
3. Use the other controls to make adjustments to the playing media.
Switching Dual Play Mode Off
Use any one of the following to switch Dual Play mode off:
1. Press the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons simultaneously again.
2. Press the 3 and 5 memory preset buttons simultaneously until the
rear seat controls are LOCKED.
3. Press the headphone/speaker button again
Using Dual Play Mode with Headphones
WARNING: Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and
do not let children operate the system while unsupervised. If
wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used, children may become
entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves.
Plug a 3.5 millimeter headphone (not included) into the headphone jack.
Press the speaker button, or the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons
simultaneously on the radio to switch on the headphones. DUAL PLAY
illuminates in the audio display, sound is no longer heard from the rear
speakers and the fade control is disabled, signaling that Dual Play is
switched on
The front speakers remain on for the front passengers. Press the speaker
button, or the 2 and 4 memory preset buttons simultaneously on the
radio again to switch off the headphones and Dual Play mode. SINGLE
PLAY illuminates in the audio display and fade control and sound from
rear speakers are restored, signaling that Dual Play is switched off.
To use any rear controls (whether in Single Play or Dual Play mode), the
rear seat controls must be switched on. To switch on Dual Play, the rear
seat controls must be switched on and the headphone icon illuminated in
the audio display. See Activating the rear audio controls previously.
122 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY INPUT JACK
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
WARNING: For safety reasons, do not connect or adjust the
settings on your portable music player while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING: Store the portable music player in a secure location,
such as the center console or the glove box, when the vehicle is
in motion. Hard objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious injury. The audio extension
cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be
safely stored while the vehicle is in motion.
The auxiliary input jack (AIJ) allows
you to connect and play music from
your portable music player through
the vehicle speakers. You can use
any portable music player designed
for use with headphones. Your audio
extension cable must have male
1
⁄
8
-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors
at each end.
1. Make sure the vehicle, radio and portable music player are turned off
and the transmission is in position P.
2. Plug the extension cable from the portable music player into the AIJ.
3. Turn on the radio. Select either a tuned FM station or a CD.
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn on your portable music player and adjust its volume to
1
⁄
2
the
maximum.
LINE IN
Audio System 123
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN appears in the display. You should
hear music from your device even if it is low.
7. Adjust the volume on your portable music player until it reaches the
volume level of the FM station or CD. Do this by switching back and
forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls.
USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
The USB port allows you to plug in
media playing devices, memory
sticks and charge devices (if
supported). See the SYNC chapter
for more information.
SATELLITE RADIO INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Satellite Radio Channels
SIRIUS威 broadcasts a variety of music, news, sports, weather, traffic and
entertainment satellite radio channels. For more information and a
complete list of SIRIUS威 satellite radio channels, visit www.siriusxm.com
in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474.
LINE IN
124 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential Satellite Radio Reception Issues
Antenna
obstructions
For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and
keep luggage and other material as far away
from the antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges,
tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can
interfere with your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may
overtake a weaker one and the audio system
may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING...to
indicate the interference and the audio
system may mute.
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio Service
Note: SIRIUS威 reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add
or delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming
changes.
SIRIUS威 satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS威
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS威
satellite radio channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call
SIRIUS威 at 1–888–539–7474.
Audio System 125
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or track your satellite radio
account. When in satellite radio mode, you can view this number by
pressing SIRIUS and memory preset 1 at the same time.
Troubleshooting
SIRIUS威 Troubleshooting Tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Acquiring Radio requires more
than two seconds to
produce audio for the
selected channel.
No action required.
This message should
disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS威
system failure
Internal module or
system failure present.
If this message does
not clear shortly, or
with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See
your authorized dealer
for service.
Invalid Channel Channel no longer
available.
Tune to another
channel or choose
another preset.
Unsubscribed Channel Subscription not
available for this
channel.
Contact SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the
channel, or tune to
another channel.
No Signal Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS威 satellite or
SIRIUS威 tower to the
vehicle antenna.
The signal is currently
being blocked. When
you move into an open
area, the signal should
return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in
progress.
No action required.
The process may take
up to three minutes.
126 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS威 Troubleshooting Tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Call SIRIUS威
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has
been deactivated by
SIRIUS威 Satellite
Radio.
Call SIRIUS威 at
1–888–539–7474 to
reactivate or resolve
subscription issues.
No Channels Available All the channels in the
selected category are
skipped or locked.
Using the channel
guide, unlock or
unskip the channels.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS威 has updated
the channels available
for your vehicle.
No action required.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that you
use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may take
your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation
of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using the device. Using
this device without running the engine can result in battery drainage. To
avoid the risk of battery drainage, please remember to turn off the
device when the vehicle is not in use for long periods of time.
The system consists of the following features:
• Seven-inch color TFT-LCD panel (480x234) with 16:9 aspect
• Built-in top-loading slot load DVD player
• Infrared (IR) transmitters for IR wireless headphones
• Audio/Video source input (three RCA jacks)
• USB 2.0 (optional)
• One-eighth inch stereo headphone jack
• Forward remote sensor on the front panel
• Full-function remote control
• Five control buttons on the front panel - POWER, SOURCE, STOP,
PLAY and EJECT
Audio System 127
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• OSD (On-screen display) control
• 12V DC power input
• FM transmitter (may be optional)
Note: Do not touch the inner pins of the jacks on the front panel.
Electrostatic discharge may cause permanent damage to the device.
Your system plays the following types of discs:
• DVD-Video: DVD contains video.
• DVD +/- R: DVD contains video.
• CD-DA: CD contains musical or sound content only.
• CD-Video: CD contains movie only.
• CD-R/RW: A disc that contains audio files (for example, a CD-R with
MP3 files), MPEG, or JPEG files.
Your system does not play the following types of discs:
• Optical disc CD-1
• CD-ROM
• DVD-ROM mini disc-CDG (audio only, not graphics)
Important Notice
It is unlawful in most jurisdictions for a person to drive a motor vehicle
which is equipped with a television viewer or screen that is located in
the motor vehicle at any point forward of the back of the driver’s seat, or
that is visible, directly or indirectly, to the driver while operating the
vehicle. In the interest of safety, the unit should never be installed where
it is visible, directly or indirectly, by the operator of the motor vehicle. If
your vehicle is equipped with a wireless rear seat audio system or any
other wireless IR device, power system off in order to operate the DVD
headrest system. If system is powered on, the two systems may interfere
with each other canceling out or creating undesirable audio through the
wireless headphones.
Safety Precaution
For safety reasons, when changing video discs it is recommended that
the vehicle not be in motion, and that you do not allow children to
unfasten safety belts to change discs or make any adjustments to the
system. System adjustments can be accomplished using the remote
control unit, while safety belts remain fastened. Enjoy your
entertainment system but remember that safety of all passengers remains
the number one priority.
128 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Wireless Headphones
This unit includes a built-in dual channel infrared transmitter for use
with a wireless headphone. The volume can then be adjusted with the
controls on each headset. The wireless headphone must be used within a
line of sight from the transmitter as infrared transmission, like visible
light, travels only in a straight line.
Wired Headphones
There is a one-eighth inch headphone jack on the device that can be
used with any standard stereo headphone. Remove and save the
protective plastic cover to access the jacks. Remember to replace the
cover when the jacks are not in use.
A/V Input
An external AV device such as a DVD player, video game device, or other
audio/video device may be connected to the unit by using the “AV
INPUT” port consisting of three RCA jacks (Yellow: Video, Red: Audio-R,
White: Audio-L). To display and listen to the video/audio signal of this
external source, connect the video source RCA cables to the AV inputs
on the monitor. The video source overrides any other video source for
that monitor.
Wireless FM Transmitter
Your device may be equipped with an external FM transmitter, which
allows you to listen to the audio signal by tuning your vehicle’s FM radio
to the selected frequency and turning SOUND AROUND on with the
remote. Whenever the SOUND AROUND is on, broadcast radio reception
may be poor. Performance varies based on geographic location. Turning
SOUND AROUND off allows normal radio reception.
How to use the FM Transmitter
Power up your system and place a disc in monitor “A”. While pointing
your remote at the monitor press the “DVD A” button directly under the
red “POWER” button on your remote control. Next press the “Sound
Around ON/ OFF” button to turn FM transmission on or off as desired.
Three buttons to right is the “Sound Around SELECT” button which
cycles through six possible stations (88.3, 88.7, 89.1, 89.5, 89.9, and
90.3MHz) for broadcasting audio to your radio. Once you’ve selected a
frequency, you must then tune your radio to the corresponding
frequency. Try each station frequency until you achieve a clear audio
signal.
Audio System 129
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Console Controls
Note: Do not use any solvents or cleaning materials when cleaning the
video device.
Note: Do not use any abrasive cleaners, that may scratch the screen. Use
only a lightly dampened lint free cloth to wipe the screen if it is dirty.
Note: Lock the LCD screen in the fully closed position when not in use.
Note: Do not put pressure on the screen.
Note: Caution children to avoid touching or scratching the screen, as it
may become dirty or damaged.
Note: Items marked with an
*
are only available on systems with a DVD
player.
A. DVD compartment slot
*
: Insert the disc, label side facing the rear
passengers.
B. Infrared transmitters: These are used to transmit audio to the
wireless headphones.
C. EJECT button
*
: Press this button to eject the disc from the DVD
compartment.
D. STOP button
*
: Press this button to stop playing the DVD/CD.
VIDEO
disc
POWER SOURCE VDEO L RAUDIO PLAY STOP ELECT
AV INPUT
H FJ
I G
C
B
A
E
D
L
N
M
O
K
130 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
E. PLAY button:
*
Press this button to play the DVD/CD.
F. Headphone jack: Allow plug-in of wired headphones with one-eighth
inch stereo connector plug for monitoring the audio from the program.
G. Video input jack (red): Connect using a cable (RCA connector).
H. Video input jack (white): Connect using a cable (RCA connector).
I. Video input jack (yellow): Connect using a cable (RCA connector).
J. USB port (optional): You can play music and images stored on a
USB Device such as a USB memory stick or memory card reader.
K. SOURCE button: Press this button to select between Monitor A,
Monitor B, AUX/TV (if available), and AUX 2 (if available).
L. POWER button: Press this button to turn the system on or off.
M. TFT LCD panel: Seven-inch TFT LCD panel.
N. Level lock and release latch: Allows the user to adjust the viewing
angle of the LCD panel or lock the panel into the secure position.
O. IR sensor - forward sensor eye: Allows the remote control to
navigate the OSD (On-screen display) on the device.
Remote Control
Note: The remote control incorporates an infrared sensor that relays
signals from the remote control to be controlled simply by pointing its
remote control at the remote sensor eye. This provides control of auxiliary
equipment such as a video DVD player. The infrared sensor cannot relay
signals from any other manufacturer’s remote control to its respective
component connected to the AUX input, such as a DVD player. In this
case, you must use the remote control supplied with the device.
Installing the Battery
Before attempting to operate your remote control, install the batteries as
follows:
1. Turn the remote control face down. Press down on the ridged area of
the battery cover and slide it off.
2. Install two AAA batteries. Make sure that proper polarity (+ or -) is
observed.
3. Slide the cover back until it clicks.
Note: Always make sure that the batteries are inserted with the positive
and negative terminals in the correct direction as shown in the battery
compartment.
Note: Different types of batteries have different characteristics. Do not
mix different types.
Audio System 131
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not mix old and new batteries. Mixing old and new batteries can
shorten battery life and/or cause chemical leaks from the old batteries.
Note: When batteries fail to function, replace them immediately.
Note: Keep the batteries out of the reach of children. Should the
batteries be swallowed, immediately consult a doctor. Also, when
disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations
or environmental public institution rules that apply in your country/area.
Note: Remove the batteries if the remote control is not used for a month
or longer.
Button Function Descriptions
Note: The remote control only operates this device. It is not a universal
remote control and does not control other equipment.
1. SOURCE: Any video equipment connected to the audio/video inputs
can be used with the monitor by pressing this button. Each time the
button is pressed, the audio/video source changes in the following
sequence: Monitor A, Monitor B, AUX/TV and AUX 2.
2. POWER: Press the button to turn the device on and off.
3. DVD-Monitor A: Transmit IR codes for DVD mode of MONITOR A.
POWER
SOURCE
A
SOUND
AROUND
SOUND
AROUNDMUTE
MENU REPEAT
CH+
CH-
TITLE SUBTITLE ANGLE AUDIO
DISPLAY
RANDOM
PLAY
123
654
789
0
CLR INT
FR FF PREV NEXT
STOP PAUSE
VOL- VOL+
PIX
A
D
VD
ON/OFF
SELECT
TV DVD TV
SETUP EJECT
B
5
9
29
27
30
17
33
28
32
31
201
2
7
11
12
4
3
15
21
22
24
26
25
8
23
6
9
10
16
13
18
11
14
19
132 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. TV-Monitor A
*
: Transmit IR codes for TV mode of Monitor A.
5. SOUND AROUND ON/OFF
*
: Turn the FM transmitter on and off.
6. MUTE: Press the button to shut off the sound transmitted to the
headphone stations. The screen displays that the sound has been
turned off. Pressing the button again restores sound to the previously
set level. This feature is only functional for DVDs.
7. MENU: Press the button to go to the Root Menu included on the
disc.
8. UP/DOWN:
• For DVD: Navigation button, you can use this button to move the
select bar to items among the menu or file list.
• For TV: Use these buttons to advance to the next higher or lower
channel.
• For OSD: Increase or decrease the setting of selected item.
9. LEFT/RIGHT: Navigation button; you can use this button to move
the select bar to one of the items in the menu or file list.
10. ENTER: Makes a selection or begins playback of the disc.
11. TITLE: Navigate the title menu included in the disc.
12. SUBTITLE: If the current disc has different subtitles options,
pressing this button brings up the menu. Press this button
repeatedly until you have reached your desired subtitles option.
13. Numbers: Decimal numbers: 0 to 9.
14. CLR: Press this button to clear any incorrect numeric input from
the number keypad.
15. PLAY: Press this button to play a disc that is inserted into the DVD
Player.
16. STOP: Stop playing the movie or songs.
• Pressing STOP once, then PLAY, resumes disc playback.
• Pressing STOP twice, then PLAY, resumes from the beginning of
the disc.
17. PAUSE: Press this button to pause the playback of the CD or DVD.
18. FR (Fast Rewind): Press this button to search disc backward
continuously. There are five speed options to choose: 2X, 4X, 8X,
16X, and 32X.
19. FF (Fast Forward): Press this button to search disc forward
continuously. There are five speed options to choose: 2X, 4X, 8X,
16X, and 32X.
20. SETUP: Navigate the Setup Menu. Refer to How to use the DVD
on-screen display (OSD) menu for more information.
21. EJECT: Eject or load a disc.
22. TV-Monitor B
*
: Transmit IR codes for TV mode of Monitor B.
Audio System 133
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
23. DVD-Monitor B: Transmit IR codes for DVD mode of Monitor B.
24. SOUND AROUND SELECT
*
: Select a FM transmitter channel.
25. PIX: Each time the button is pressed, the picture adjustment OSD,
cycles through bars for BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, SATURATION,
HUE, SHARPNESS, IR HEADPHONE, and RESET. Once the desired
adjustment bar is displayed, use the UP/DOWN button to adjust the
setting. The bar display automatically disappears if no adjustments
are made within six seconds or if any button is pressed.
26. REPEAT: Press this button to switch the repeat mode by ALL,
TITLE, CHAPTER and cancel the repeat mode while playing
DVD-video. Other disc types such as VCD, CD, and SVCD only have
two repeat modes that can be selected: TRACK and ALL. Note:
Both repeat functions of VCD and SVCD need the PBC status set to
ON when available.
27. AUDIO: Press this button if the current disc has different language
options. Press this button repeatedly until you have reached your
desired language option.
28. ANGLE: View with a different camera angle (the button takes
effect only on the DVD that supports frames with multiple angles).
Press this button repeatedly until you have reached your desired
viewing angle.
29. DISPLAY: Shows information on the screen including title,
chapter/track, time elapsed, and time remaining, or turn off the
display.
30. RANDOM: Play titles randomly.
31. INT (Intro/Scan): Press this button to play each audio file for
10 seconds to scan/review the files.
32. NEXT: When a disc has more than one Chapter, Track, or File, you
can move to another Chapter/Track/File. Press the button briefly
during play to select the next Chapter for DVD-video or Track/File
for VCD, SVCD, MP3, CD, etc.
33. PREV: When a disc has more than one Chapter, Track, or File, you
can move to another Chapter/Track/File. Press this button briefly
during play to step back to the previous Chapter for DVD-video or
Track/File for VCD, SVCD, MP3, CD, etc.
*
If available
134 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Turning the Device On and Off
1.
Pivot the screen downward until a comfortable viewing angle is reached.
2. Press the POWER button on the lower-left corner of the front panel or
the remote control to turn the device on or off. When in use, the
controls are lit.
3. After the device has been turned on and is displaying a picture, adjust
the viewing angle by pivoting the screen to optimize the picture quality.
4. Remember to turn the device off and pivot the LCD panel to the locked
position when not in use.
DVD Basics
To get the most use out of each DVD, make sure you read this section
completely.
Regional Coding
Both the DVD player and disc are coded by region. These regional codes
must match in order for the disc to play. If the codes do not match, the
disc does not play by default. The system is preset to the region code
designated for your area by the DVD Copy Control Association. Other
regions may not be played in this system.
Loading and Playing Discs
When you press the POWER button the system turns on in DVD mode.
Place the disc about halfway into the disc compartment slot, with the
disc’s label facing the rear of the vehicle. player, do NOT insert the disc
at an angle. The disc must be inserted straight into the player.
The disc loads automatically and begin to play. (Some discs may start at
the root menu, where play must be selected to start movie.)
Depending on the disk and playback location on the disc, the icon may
be displayed in the upper-left corner of the screen indicating that still
playback is not possible.
Notes
• To keep a disc clean, do not touch its surface. Handle the disc by its
edge.
• Keep your discs in their cases or disc magazines when not in use.
Also, do not subject disc to heat/high temperature. Avoid leaving
them in a parked vehicle or on a dashboard/rear tray.
•
Do not attach labels, or use discs with sticky ink/residue. Such discs may
stop spinning when used, causing a malfunction, or may ruin the disc.
Audio System 135
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Do not use any discs with labels or stickers attached. The following
malfunctions may result from using such discs:
• Inability to eject a disc (due to a label or sticker peeling off and
jamming the eject mechanism).
• Inability to read audio data correctly (i.e., playback skipping, or no
playback) due to heat shrinking of a sticker or label causing a disc to
warp.
• Before playing, clean the discs with a commercially available cleaning
cloth. Wipe each disc from the center out. Do not use solvents such as
benzene, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or antistatic spray
intended for analog discs.
• Use only normal, round discs. If you insert irregular, non-round, shaped
discs they may jam in the DVD player or not play properly.
How To Use the DVD On-screen Display (OSD) Menus
You can use the OSD menu screen to adjust all the settings on your
screen.
General Setup
Press the SETUP button on the remote control, use the up/down and
left/right arrow buttons to navigate the Setup Page. Press ENTER to
select and then the left arrow button to return to the submenu.
To cancel using the Setup Display, press the SETUP button on the remote.
OSD Language
The OSD Lang submenu allows the user to select the language for the
on-screen display. Press the right arrow button and then use the
up/down buttons on the remote control to select the desired language.
The user can select English, Simple/Traditional Chinese, French, German,
Italian, Spanish, Portuguese or Korean for the OSD language. Press
ENTER to select and then the left arrow button to return to the
submenu.
Angle Mark
The angle mark is an option for different viewing angles on the DVD.
Press the left/right arrow buttons to turn the angle mark setting on or
off. Press ENTER to select and then the left arrow button to return to
the submenu.
Audio Setup
Press the SETUP button on the remote control, use the up/down and the
left/right buttons to navigate the Setup Page. Press ENTER to select and
then the left arrow button to return to the submenu.
136 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Speaker Setup
Press the Setup button on the remote control. Press the right arrow button
once to reach the Audio Setup Page. Press ENTER to navigate to the
submenu. Use the up/down and left/right arrow buttons to navigate the
submenus. Press the ENTER or right arrow button to select an item and
then the left/right arrow buttons to see the selection items. Press ENTER
to select and then the left arrow button to return to the submenu.
The Speaker Setup menu has the following options:
• LT/RT
• Stereo
• V SURR
• OFF
The Dolby Digital Setup menu has the following options:
• Stereo
• L-Mono
• R-Mono
• Mix-Mono
Quality Setup
Press the SETUP button on the remote control, then use the up/down
and left/right arrow buttons to navigate the Setup Page. Press ENTER to
select and then the left arrow button to return to the submenu.
Video Quality Setup
Press the SETUP button on the remote control, then press the right
arrow button to navigate to the Video Setup Page. Press ENTER twice to
enter the submenu. Use the up/down and the left/right arrow buttons to
navigate the submenus. Press the ENTER or right arrow button to select
an item and then the left/right arrow buttons to see the selection items.
Press ENTER to select and then the left arrow button to return to the
submenu.
Video Quality
The following features can be adjusted:
• SHARPNESS: Adjust to soften or sharpen the picture.
(Low/Med./High)
•
BRIGHTNESS: Adjust to brighten or darken the picture. (-20 to +20)
• CONTRAST: Adjust to increase or decrease picture contrast. (-16 to +16)
• HUE: Adjust to increase or decrease the color hue. (-9 to +9)
• SATURATION: Adjust to increase or decrease color intensity. (-9 to +9)
Audio System 137
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How To Use the Device On-screen Display (OSD) Menus
Press the SETUP button on the remote control, then use the up/down and
the left/right arrow buttons to navigate the Setup Page. Press ENTER to
select and then the left arrow button to return to the submenu.
Audio
This allows the user to control the audio stream in the selected language
for playback automatically.
Subtitle
This allows the user to turn the subtitles on and off in the selected
language for playback automatically.
Disc Menu
This allows the user to control the DVD disc menu in the selected language.
Parental
This section of the Setup Menu allows user to control the content of
movie playback from G to ADULT. The parental control function allows
you to limit viewing to your preference. The rating levels are 1 through 8
and are country-dependent.
After navigating to the Parental submenu, use the right arrow button and
the up/down arrow buttons to select:
• KID SAFE (Children)
• G
• PG
• PG 13
• PGR
• R
• NC 17
• ADULT
Note: The lower the value, the more strict the limitation.
Password
Press the SETUP button and navigate to the Password submenu under
the Password Setup Page.
1. Press the right arrow button and then press the ENTER button on
the remote control to enter the submenu.
2. Input the old password or the default password (six digits). The
default password is 136900.
3. Input a new password (six digits) using numeric buttons.
4. Confirm the new password by entering the same new password again.
138 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Scroll to the OK button and press the ENTER button on the remote
control. The password has been changed.
Default
Press the SETUP button on the remote control, navigate to the Default
submenu under the Preference page using the up/down and right arrow
buttons.
Press the right arrow button, then press ENTER to carry out the reset
(this function does not affect the parental settings).
Playing an Audio CD
When playing an audio CD, the DISPLAY banner appears automatically. It
displays the current track and the amount of time the track has been
playing, the total amount of time on the disc and the current time
running on the disc.
Press the DISPLAY button on the remote control to display the DISPLAY
banner.
• Press DISPLAY one time: “Single Elapsed” appears along with the
current track playing and the time of that track.
• Press DISPLAY two times: “Single Remain” appears along with the
current track playing and the amount of time left.
• Press DISPLAY three times: “Total Elapsed” appears along with the
current track playing and the total time playing on CD.
• Press DISPLAY four times: “Total Remain” appears along with the
current track playing and the amount of time left on CD.
Press the REPEAT button on the remote control to either repeat the
currently playing track or the entire CD.
Playing an MP3 Disc
MP3 is a format for storing digital audio. An audio CD-quality song can
be compressed into the MP3 format with very little loss of quality, while
taking up much less space. CD-R discs that have been encoded in MP3
format can be played in your DVD player.
Selecting Folders and Songs
When an MP3 disc is inserted in the player, the navigation screen
appears automatically. You can change folders and songs by navigating
the file system. The DVD player plays the songs in the order they were
burned to the disc.
1. If a disc is playing, press the DISPLAY button on the remote control,
and then press the up/down arrow buttons to go through the folder
list on the left side of the navigation screen.
Audio System 139
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Once the folder you want is highlighted, press the ENTER button on
the remote control.
3. Press the up/down arrow buttons on the remote control to go
through the song list and highlight the song you want. Press the
ENTER button to begin the playback of the highlighted song.
Skipping Songs
Press the NEXT button on the remote control to move to the next song.
Use the PREV button to move to the beginning of the currently playing
song. Press the PREV button twice to move to the previous song.
Selecting a Play Mode
You can choose what order the songs play on a disc temporarily. The
FOLDER play mode is the default. To access the play mode operations,
press the REPEAT button on the remote control. The play mode options
are as follows:
• Single: Play a selected song.
• Repeat One: Repeat the song that is playing.
• Folder: Play the folder in the order the songs were recorded.
• Folder Repeat: Repeat the folder that is playing.
• Random: Play the songs in the random order.
• Shuffle: Play the songs in random order (within the selected folder).
Order of Tracks
The DVD-headrest module plays the files in the order that they were
written to the USB drive. Therefore, the playing order may not be the
same as the order shown on your device or as expected. To access the
file structure/menus, for the USB device, you need the remote control
set to the appropriate systems (A or B).
Upon insertion, the USB device may begin playing files automatically,
returning to the previous position, if it was unplugged during a previous
playback. To return to the menus, press MENU or LEFT ARROW,
depending on the type of file being played. The current directory
appears, listing all file types.
Controls
• MENU: Return to the menu structure.
• UP/DOWN: Moves the select bar up/down within the selected
menu/file list.
• LEFT: Moves menu up one level. Returns to the menu structure for
some functions.
• RIGHT: Selects menu item.
140 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• ENTER: Makes a selection or begins playback of files.
• PLAY: Press this button to play file.
• STOP: Stops playing the movie/song.
• PAUSE: While item is playing, press this button to temporarily stop
the playback.
• FR (Fast Rewind): Press to move backwards (2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, 32x)
within a file.
• FF (Fast Forward): Press to move forwards (2x, 4x, 8x, 16x, 32x)
within a file.
• PREV: Moves to the previous file.
• NEXT: Moves to the next file.
Connecting an MP3 Device
Connecting an MP3 Device to Your DVD-headrest Module via USB
Plug the MP3 Dock Connector to USB cable into a high-power USB port
on your DVD-headrest module, and then connect the other end to the
player.
See the documentation that came with your device for more information.
Charging the MP3 Player Battery
Connect the device to the USB port on your DVD-headrest module. The
DVD-headrest module must be turned on. Depending on the device, it
may or may not charge when connected to the USB port.
Note: Not all devices are able to charge when connected to the USB
port.
Connecting an MP3 Device to Your DVD-headrest Module via A/V
Cable
1. Connect the device using an A/V cable to the headphones port .
Note: Use the A/V cable made specifically for the device. Other
similar RCA-type cables might not work.
2. Connect the video and audio connectors to the AV-IN ports on your
DVD-headrest module, matching the yellow, red and white
connectors to the appropriate jacks.
Audio System 141
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting
Symptom Possible Cause
Device does not power
on
• Vehicle ignition is not turned on.
• Batteries not installed in remote control.
IR sensor inoperative • Batteries in remote control are not working.
• Remote sensor eye is blocked.
• The infrared transmitter is affixed over the
sensor eye of the component to be controlled.
Disc does not play • The disc was inserted backward.
• The disc is defective. Try another disc.
• The disc is not compatible with the
entertainment system.
• The device code and disc region code do not
match. This device is set to Region 1.
Disc plays, but then
stops immediately
• The disc is dirty and needs cleaning.
• Condensation has formed inside the device.
Allow the player to dry out.
No picture • The signal source is not connected.
• The setting may be in the wrong status.
Match the monitor mode with the source
correctly.
Distorted picture • The disc may be dirty. Check the disc for
fingerprints and clean with a soft cloth, wiping
from center to edge.
• Sometimes a small amount of picture
distortion may appear. This is not a
malfunction.
Cannot advance
through a movie
• You cannot advance through the opening
credits and warning information that appears
at the beginning of movies because the disc is
programmed to prohibit that action.
142 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Symptom Possible Cause
No sound or distorted
sound
• The DVD player is not connected properly,
or cables are not securely inserted into the
appropriate jacks.
• If you are using the wireless headphones,
make sure you turn on the IR power.
• Headphone volume is too low.
• Something may be blocking the signal
between the monitor and the headphones.
Device feels warm • If the device is in use for a long time, it does
become warm. This is normal.
Player does not
respond to all
commands during
playback
• Operations are not permitted by the disc.
• Refer to the instructions in the disc inlay.
Compliance Information
FCC Notice
This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This device generates, uses, and
can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this device does cause
unacceptable interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the device off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the device and receiver.
• Connect the device into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
FCC Warning:
To assure continued FCC compliance, the user must use the provided
grounded power supply cord and the shielded video interface cable with
bonded ferrite cores. Also, any unauthorized change or modifications to
this device would void the user’s authority to operate this device.
Audio System 143
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Macrovision Notice
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision,
and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
Warranty
INVISION Automotive Systems Inc., (the “Company”) warrants to the
original retail purchaser of this product, when purchased from a
participating new car dealership, that should this product under normal
use and conditions, be proven defective in material or workmanship,
such defect(s) will be repaired or replaced with reconditioned product
(at the Company’s option) without charge for parts and repair labor
when the work is performed by the original dealership of purchase, or an
authorized representative of that dealership.
This Warranty will match the warranty of the Original Equipment
Manufacturer (“OEM”) when installed on a new vehicle with a minimum
of 36 months or 36,000 miles. If the product is installed on a used
vehicle, then only a 12 month or 12,000 mile Warranty from the date of
installation will apply. This Warranty is not applicable to any extended
warranty purchased.
To obtain repair or replacement within the terms of this Warranty, the
product must be returned to a participating new car dealership for
warranty service or replacement. The dealership will perform
troubleshooting to determine if repair or replacement is warranted. If a
participating dealership cannot be contacted, then the Purchaser should
contact the Company to obtain the name and location of a dealership
where service under this Warranty can be obtained.
This Warranty does not extend to the elimination of externally generated
static or noise, correction of antenna problems, costs incurred for
installation, removal or reinstallation of the product, or to damage to
digital memory devices, media devices, gaming devices, discs, speakers,
accessories, or vehicle electrical systems.
This Warranty does not apply to any product or part thereof which, in
the opinion of the Company, has suffered or been damaged through
alteration, improper installation, mishandling, misuse, neglect, accident,
or by removal or defacement of the factory serial number/bar code
label(s). THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS
144 Audio System
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARRANTY IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT
PROVIDED ABOVE AND, IN NO EVENT, SHALL THE COMPANY’S
LIABILITY EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER
FOR THE PRODUCT.
This Warranty is in lieu of all other express warranties or liabilities. ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS
WRITTEN WARRANTY. ANY ACTION FOR BREACH OF ANY
WARRANTY HEREUNDER, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY, MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN A PERIOD OF 48
MONTHS FROM THE DATE OF ORIGINAL PURCHASE. IN NO CASE
SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS OR ANY OTHER
WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WHATSOEVER. No person or
representative is authorized to assume for the Company any liability
other than expressed herein in connection with the sale of this product.
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty
lasts or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damage
so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This
Warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other
rights which vary from state to state.
Audio System 145
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITHOUT
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS
A. AUTO: Press to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or
recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected
temperature.
B. EXT: Press to display the outside temperature. Press again to display
the interior temperature.
Note: The exterior temperature reading is more accurate when the
vehicle is moving.
C. REAR (on/off): Press to turn on the auxiliary climate controls in the
rear of the floor console. Press again to turn the auxiliary system off.
When this button is pressed, the display only shows the rear temperature
setting. After the rear setting changes are completed on the front
control, the display automatically shows both climate settings.
D. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
E. REAR (temperature control): Press to turn on the auxiliary
climate control system and to set the desired rear temperature with the
front control. The rear temperature is the same as the front temperature
when only the center rear temperature bar is lit. The rear temperature is
different from the front temperature when more than one rear
temperature bar is lit.
AUTO
OFF
EXT REAR
F
A/C
R
R
R
R
O
A
P N M L K J I H
D E
F
G
R
Q
B C
146 Climate Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When this button is pressed, the display only shows the rear temperature
setting. After the rear setting changes are completed on the front
control, the display automatically shows both climate settings.
F. Passenger temperature control: Press and turn to increase or
decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
G. Rear defrost: Press to turn the heated windows and mirrors on and
off. See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
H. Auxiliary climate control fan speed: Press to turn on the auxiliary
climate control system or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front
control.
I. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. Using recirculated air can reduce the time needed to
cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
J. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools the
vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting your
vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three minutes.
K. Footwell/Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster
vents, demister vents and floor vents.
L. Footwell: Distributes air through the floor vents.
M. Instrument panel/Footwell: Distributes air through the instrument
panel vents, floor vents, and demister vents.
N. Instrument panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel
vents.
O. Manual override controls: Press buttons I through P to override
automatic control (AUTO). To return to automatic operation, press
AUTO.
P. Front fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle. Press to increase or decrease fan speed.
Q. OFF: Turn the climate control system off. When the system is off,
outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
R. Driver temperature control: Press to turn the climate control
system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature for
the driver side of the vehicle.
This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone
operation is disengaged.
Climate Control 147
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM WITH
HEATED AND COOLED SEATS
A. AUTO: Press to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically
determines fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or
recirculated air, to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected
temperature.
B. A/C: Press to turn air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools
the vehicle using outside air. To improve air conditioning when starting
your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes.
C. EXT: Press to display the outside temperature. Press again to display
the interior temperature.
Note: The exterior temperature reading is more accurate when the
vehicle is moving.
D. Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. Using recirculated air can reduce the time needed to
cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
E. Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear the
windshield of a thin covering of ice.
AUTO
OFF
A/C EXT
F
REAR
R
R
R
R
A
P O N M L K J I
E F
G
H
R
Q
B DC
148 Climate Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
F. REAR (temperature control): Press to turn on the auxiliary climate
control system and to set the desired rear temperature with the front
control. The rear temperature is the same as the front temperature when
only the center rear temperature bar is lit. The rear temperature is
different from the front temperature when more than one rear
temperature bar is lit.
When this button is pressed, the display only shows the rear temperature
setting. After the rear setting changes are completed on the front
control, the display automatically shows both climate settings.
G. Passenger temperature control: Press and turn to increase or
decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle.
H. Rear defrost: Press to turn the heated windows and mirrors on and
off. See Heated windows and mirrors later in this chapter for more
information.
I. Auxiliary climate control fan speed: Press to turn on the auxiliary
climate control system or to adjust the rear fan speed from the front
control.
J. Passenger heated seat control: Press to switch the passenger
heated seat on and off. See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
K. Passenger cooled seat control: Press to switch the passenger
cooled seat on and off. See Heated and cooled seats in the Seats
chapter for more information.
L. REAR (on/off): Press to turn on the auxiliary climate controls in the
rear of the floor console. Press again to turn the auxiliary system off.
When this button is pressed, the display only shows the rear temperature
setting. After the rear setting changes are completed on the front
control, the display automatically shows both climate settings.
M. Air distribution control: Turn to set the air distribution to a
position listed below:
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents.
Distributes air through the instrument panel vents, floor vents,
and demister vents.
Climate Control 149
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Distributes air through the floor vents.
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents, demister
vents and floor vents.
Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. This setting can also be used to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
N. Driver heated seat control: Press to switch the driver heated seat
on and off. See Heated seats in the Seats chapter for more information.
O. Driver cooled seat control: Press to switch the driver cooled seat
on and off. See Heated and cooled seats in the Seats chapter for more
information.
P. Front fan speed control: Controls the volume of air circulated in
your vehicle. Press to increase or decrease fan speed.
Q. Footwell/Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster
vents, demister vents and floor vents.
R. Footwell: Distributes air through the floor vents.
S. Instrument panel/Footwell: Distributes air through the instrument
panel vents, floor vents, and demister vents.
T. Instrument panel: Distributes air through the instrument panel
vents.
U. Manual override controls: Press buttons I through P to override
automatic control (AUTO). To return to automatic operation, press
AUTO.
V. OFF: Turn the climate control system off. When the system is off,
outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle.
W. Driver temperature control: Press to turn the climate control
system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the air temperature for
the driver side of the vehicle.
This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone
operation is disengaged.
150 Climate Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Your auxiliary climate controls are located on the rear of the center console
and can be used when REAR has been pressed on the front climate control
system. The temperature is set by the front controls. Use the rear control
to adjust the fan speed or turn the auxiliary controls off (O).
A. Fan speed control: Turn to select the desired fan speed.
B. Temperature and air distribution control: The distribution of air
is based on the temperature selected. Adjust for comfort.
GENERAL OPERATING TIPS
• To reduce fog build-up on the windshield during humid weather,
select Defrost. Temperature and fan speed can also be increased to
improve clearing.
• To reduce humidity build-up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
system off or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the back seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base
of the windshield.
Cooling the interior quickly:
1. Adjust the fan speed to the highest speed setting initially and then
adjust it to suit the desired comfort level.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the lowest temperature setting.
3. Adjust the air distribution control to the MAX A/C position.
Recommended settings for cooling:
• Adjust the air distribution control to the A/C position.
If your vehicle stationary for extended periods during extreme high
ambient temperatures
• Select MAX A/C position.
1
2
3
4
A
B
Climate Control 151
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For maximum cooling performance in manual override control:
1. Choose Panel, A/C, and recirc controls.
2. Set the temperature to LO.
3. Set the fan to the highest blower setting.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold or humid weather:
1. Select Floor/Panel.
2. Select A/C.
3. Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
6. To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the
vents located in the middle of the instrument panel.
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED)
Heated Rear Window
Note: The vehicle must be running to use this feature.
Press the control to clear the rear window of thin ice and fog. Press the
control again within 15 minutes to switch it off. It turns off automatically
after approximately 15 minutes, or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions could
cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both mirrors are heated to remove ice, mist and fog when the rear
window defroster is activated.
152 Climate Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SITTING IN THE CORRECT POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly out of position or with the
seatback reclined too far can take off weight from the seat
cushion and affect the passenger sensing system, resulting in serious
injury or death in a crash. Always sit upright against your seatback,
with your feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback as this can cause the
occupant to slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe
personal injury in the event of a collision.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher than the seatbacks to
reduce the risk of injury in a collision or during heavy braking or
when stopping suddenly.
When you use them properly, the
seat, head restraint, safety belt and
airbags will provide optimum
protection in the event of a
collision. We recommend that you
follow these guidelines:
• Do not recline the seatback more
than 30 degrees from vertical.
• Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as
possible.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top of it is level with the top of
your head and as far forward as possible, remaining comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches (250 millimeters) between your
breastbone and the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can
maintain full control of your vehicle.
Seats 153
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash, you and the passenger occupants should not sit in and/or
operate the vehicle, until the head restraint is placed in its proper
position. Never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: The adjustable head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted
when the seat is occupied.
WARNING: Install the head restraint properly to minimize the
risk of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright driving position before adjusting
any head restraint. Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of
the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as
close as possible to the back of your head. For occupants of extremely
tall stature, adjust the head restraint to its full up position.
Front Seat Head Restraints
The head restraints consist of :
A. An energy absorbing head restraint
B. Two steel stems
C. Guide sleeve adjust and release button
D. Guide sleeve unlock and remove button
154 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raise
Pull up the head restraint.
Lower
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push down on the head restraint.
Remove
1. Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment
position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull up the head restraint.
Reinstall
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint
down until it locks.
Second row outboard seat head restraints – The outboard head
restraints are non-adjustable, but they can be folded.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (A),
• and a fold strap (B).
1. Pull the fold strap to fold the outboard head restraint.
2. Pull up on the head restraint to place the head restraint back to the
upright position.
Second row center seat head restraint – The center rear head
restraint is fixed and non-adjustable. The head restraint consists of a
trimmed foam covering over the upper structure of the seatback.
A
B
Seats 155
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Third row head restraints – The third row head restraints are non
adjustable, but they can be folded.
The non-adjustable head restraints
consist of:
• a trimmed energy absorbing foam
and structure (A),
• and a fold strap (B).
1. Pull the fold strap to fold the head restraint.
2. Pull up on the head restraint to place the head restraint back to the
upright position.
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back.
WARNING: Never adjust the driver’s seat or seat back when the
vehicle is moving.
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Move the
switch in the direction of the arrow
to raise or lower the seat cushion or
to move the seat forward, backward,
up or down.
A
B
156 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Power Recline
Move the switch to recline the seat
back forward or rearward.
Note: On vehicles with memory seats, to prevent damage to the seat,
the power seats are designed to set a stopping position just short of the
end of the seat track. If the seat encounters an object while moving
forward or backward, a new stopping position will be set. To reset the
seat to its normal stopping position:
• After encountering the new stopping position, press the power seat
control again to override.
• Continue pressing the control until it reaches the end of the seat
track.
• Continue pressing the control for approximately two seconds. You will
feel the seat bounce back slightly.
Power Lumbar
The control is located on the
outboard side of the seat. Press the
forward or rearward side of the
control for more or less support.
Seats 157
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MEMORY FUNCTION
This feature will save and recall the positions of the driver seat, power
mirrors, adjustable pedals, and steering column.
The memory seat control is located
on left side of the driver’s seat.
Programming Memory Positions
1. To program position 1, move the memory features to their desired
position using the associated controls.
2. Press and hold button 1 for about two seconds. A chime will sound
confirming that a memory position has been set.
To program position 2, repeat the previous procedure using button 2.
A memory position may be programmed at any time.
To program the memory feature to a remote entry transmitter, see the
Keys and Remote Control chapter.
Recalling Saved Memory Positions
To recall position 1 settings, press and release memory button 1. The
memory features will move to the saved memory 1 position.
The memory positions can also be recalled when you:
• press your remote entry transmitter unlock control (if the transmitter
is programmed to a memory position) or,
• enter a valid personal entry code that is programmed to a memory
position.
If the easy entry/exit feature is enabled, the mirrors and pedals will move
to the programmed memory position and the seat will move to the easy
entry position. The seat will move to the driving memory position when
the ignition is activated.
A programmed memory position can be recalled:
• in any gearshift position if the ignition is not on.
• only in position P or N if the ignition is on.
2
1
158 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Easy-Entry/Exit Feature (If Equipped)
If the easy entry/exit feature is enabled, this feature automatically moves
the driver’s seat rearward 2 inches (5 centimeters) when the transmission
selector lever is in position P and the key is removed from the ignition.
If the seat is located less than 2 inches (5 centimeters) from the rear of
the seat track, the seat travel will be less than 2 inches (5 centimeters)
rearward.
The driver’s seat will return to the previous position when the key is put
in the ignition.
This feature is enabled or disabled through the information display. See
the Information Displays chapter for more information.
Climate Controlled Seats (If Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The heated seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the heated seats:
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle through the various
heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
Seats 159
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the engine is running.
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle through the various
cooling settings and off. Cooler settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPMs while the cooled seats are on, the
feature will turn itself off and will need to be reactivated.
Heated and Cooled Seats Air Filter Replacement (If Equipped)
The heated and cooled seat system includes air filters that must be
replaced periodically. See scheduled maintenance information for
more information.
There is a filter located under each front seat. The filter can be accessed
from the second row seat. Move the front seats all the way forward and
up to ease access.
To remove a filter:
1. Remove the key from the
ignition.
2. Press up on the outside rigid
edge of the filter and rotate
counterclockwise once the tabs are
released.
3. Remove the filter.
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its
housing making sure that the far
forward end is all the way up in the
housing.
2. Then push in on the center of the
outside edge of the filter and rotate
up into the housing until it clips
into position.
A/C
160 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR SEATS
Folding Down the 2nd Row 40% Seat System
WARNING: Use caution when folding the seat back to the flat
back position as the system will move forward when you lift the
release handle.
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back. After returning the seat back to its original
position, pull on the seat back to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Make sure that the head restraint is in the down position and no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the
second row seats before folding them down.
Move the front passenger seat forward so that the second row seat
headrest clears the front seat.
1. Lower the head restraints by
pulling on the strap.
Seats 161
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Locate handle on the side of the
seat cushion by the door.
3. Pull up on the handle and push
the seat back forward toward the
front of the vehicle.
To return the seat to the upright position:
1. Lift the seat back toward the rear
of the vehicle.
2. Rotate the seat back until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
3. Lift up on the head restraint until
it locks into its original position.
162 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Placing the 2nd Row Outboard 40% Seats in Cargo Mode
WARNING: Use caution when folding the seat back to the flat
back position as the system will move forward when you lift the
release handle.
WARNING: Always return the seat from the kneel position prior to
raising the seat back. Failure to do so could result in personal injury.
The 2nd row seats can be placed in a kneel down load floor position to
allow more cargo space.
To place the seats in the cargo mode:
1. Fold down the 2nd row seat.
2. Pull the cargo mode lever up to
release the seat into a kneel down
load floor position.
Returning to the upright position from full lowered load floor
position
The seat back cannot be returned to the upright position until the seat is
returned from the kneel down position. To return the seat to the upright
position:
1. Push the seat rearward until the
latch is engaged.
2. Return the seat back to the
upright position.
Seats 163
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting the 2nd Row Outboard 40% Seat for E-Z Entry
WARNING: Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether
the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
WARNING: After using the E-Z Entry feature make sure there
are not any objects, cargo or the feet of a 3rd row occupant
under the 2nd row seat when latching the seat to the floor. Injury to
the 3rd row occupants feet or damage to the seat may occur.
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back. After returning the seat back to its original
position, pull on the seat back to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
The E-Z entry seat allows for easier entry and exit to and from the 3rd
row seat.
To enter the 3rd row seat:
1. Fold down the 2nd row seat and
release the handle.
2. Pull the handle up again until the
seat releases from the floor.
3. Push the seat upward and fold it
away from the third row.
164 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To return the seat to a seating position:
1. Push the seat down and latch to
the floor.
2. Bring the seat back to an upright
position. The seat back should lock
into position.
Note: If the seat back will not return to the upright position, tumble the
seat again and re-latch it to the floor. Be sure that cargo or other objects
are not trapped underneath the seat back.
Note: If a squeak is heard from the
latch area, the latch striker pin
should be wiped clean of dust or
debris.
Exiting the 3rd Row
1. Pull the strap located at the
bottom outboard of the seat back to
release the seat from the floor, and
rotate the seat up towards the front
seat.
2. Follow the directions above to
return the seat from the E-Z entry
and to the upright position.
Seats 165
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Reclining the 2nd Row Outboard 40% Seatback
WARNING: Reclining the seat back can cause an occupant to
slide under the seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a collision.
Locate the release handle on the
outboard side of the seat cushion.
Lift to allow the seatback to be
adjusted to the desired location.
Folding the 2nd Row Center 20% Seat System (if equipped)
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety
belts, ensure that the safety belts are not buckled when moving
the seat to the load floor position.
WARNING: Before returning the seatback to its original position,
make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped underneath
the seatback. After returning the seatback to its original position, pull
on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched. An unlatched seat
may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision.
1. Locate the release handle located
in the upper left seat back, and pull
the handle to release the folding
seat latch.
166 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. With the latch released the
seatback can be lowered into the
load floor position.
3. To return the seat to the upright
position, lift the seatback until the
latch is fully engaged.
Adjusting the 2nd Row Center 20% Seat (if equipped)
Note: This seat can be moved forward to keep a child in a child restraint
close to the front seat occupants. The seat should be moved to the full
rearward position when it is occupied by older children or adults,
including children in booster seats.
Lift the handle to move the seat
forward or backward.
Seats 167
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Rear Heated Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element
which may cause the seat heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat
• Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on the rear of the center console.
The heated seats only operate when the ignition is on. To operate the
heated seats:
Press the heated seat button to cycle through the various
heat settings and off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
3rd Row Seats
Make sure that no objects are on the floor in front of the third row seats
or on the seat cushion before lowering them. Make sure that the head
restraints are lowered and the second row seats are not reclined.
168 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Folding Down the 3rd Row Seats to the Load Floor
WARNING: To prevent possible damage to the seat or safety
belts, make sure that the safety belts are not buckled when
moving the seat to the load floor position.
WARNING: Before returning the seat back to its original
position, make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped
behind the seat back. After returning the seat back to its original
position, pull on the seat back to ensure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or
collision.
Before folding the third row seats,
fold the head restraints down by
pulling on the strap located at the
bottom of the restraint.
Pull up on the handle located
behind the seat back while pushing
the seat back forward and down
into the seat cushion.
To return the seat back to its original position, lift the seat back until it
latches into place.
Seats 169
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PowerFold姞 Third-row Seat (if equipped)
Note: The power fold down seats will operate for 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is in off. The transmission must be in position P, and the
liftgate, or liftgate glass must be open. Similar to the battery saver
feature, the power 3rd row seat will be disabled 10 minutes after turning
the vehicle off.
Note: Be sure that the head restraints are folded down before powering
the 3rd row seat down.
The control buttons are located on
the right-hand rear quarter trim
panel (accessible from the liftgate
area).
Press B to lower the desired seat
back. Press A to return the seat
back to its original position.
If the power 3rd row seat is disabled after 10 minutes, the seat can be
enabled by the following:
• opening any door
• pressing the unlock button on the key fob
• pressing any keyless entry keypad button
• or turning the ignition key.
B
A A
B
UP
FOLD
UP
FOLD
170 Seats
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The appearance of your vehicle’s universal garage door opener will vary
according to your option package. Before programing, make sure you
identify which transmitter you have by comparing it to the graphics
below.
HomeLink威
Car2U威 Home Automation
System
Note: The programming of the two types of universal garage door
openers are different and have different instructions. Identify your
package and refer to the instructions listed in this chapter.
CAR2U姞 HOME AUTOMATION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 171
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.
Note: Programming the system to a community gate will require a
unique set of instructions depending on the gate system model. Contact
the help line at 1-866-572-2728 for further information.
Note: If you accidently enter the program mode by pressing and
releasing the outer two buttons or all three buttons simultaneously, do
not press any button until the module times out after a few seconds and
resets to normal mode. When the module has timed out, all three LED
lamps will flash rapidly for a few seconds then turn off. Any settings
should remain as previously set.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun
visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of
devices with the home. As well as being programmed for garage doors,
the system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devices
and home lighting systems.
Additional system information can be found on-line at www.learcar2U.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-866-572-2728.
172
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Rolling Code Programming
Note: If you do not follow the time-sensitive instructions, the device will
time out and you will have to repeat the complete procedure.
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the outer two
buttons for 1–2 seconds, then
release.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
Note: If you cannot locate the learn
button, see the Owner’s Manual for
your garage door opener or call the
toll-free help line at 1-866-572-2728.
3. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 10–30 seconds
to complete the following steps.
4. Return to your car.
5. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door. You may
need to hold the button from
5–20 seconds, during which time
the selected button LED lamp will flash slowly.
6. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
The LED lamp will flash rapidly until programming is complete.
7. Press and release the button again. The garage door should move,
confirming that programming is successful. If your garage door does not
operate, repeat the previous steps.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
To program another rolling code device, repeat Steps 1 through 6,
substituting a different function button in Step 4.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 173
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fixed Code Programming
Note: It may be helpful to have another person assist you in
programming the transmitter.
To program units with fixed code
DIP switches, you will need the
garage door hand-held transmitter,
paper and a pen or pencil.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Open the battery cover and note
all the switch settings from left to
right.
When the switch is in the up, on, or + position, mark down “left button”.
When the switch is in the middle, neutral, or 0 position, mark down
“middle button”.
When the switch is in the down, off, or – position, mark down “right
button”.
3. Press all three function buttons
simultaneously for a few seconds
and then release. The LED lamps
will flash slowly.
Note: The following step must be
completed within 2.5 minutes.
4. Enter the corresponding DIP
switch settings from left to right
into the system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to
the settings you noted.
5. Simultaneously press and release all three function buttons. The LED
lamps will illuminate.
6. Press and hold the function
button you would like to use to
control the garage door.
Note: You may need to hold the
button from 5–55 seconds before
observing movement of the garage
door.
7. When the garage door moves, release the button within one second.
When the button is released, the LED lamp will flash slowly.
174
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
8. The LED lamp will begin to flash rapidly until programming is
complete. If your garage door does not operate, repeat the previous
steps. Otherwise, call the toll-free help line at 1-866-572-2728.
The LED lamp above the selected button will illuminate to confirm that
the system is responding to the button command.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
LED lamps above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the LED lamps flash, release the buttons. The codes for all
buttons are erased.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Make sure that the garage door and security device
are free from obstruction when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system with any garage door opener
that does not have the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this includes any garage
door opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
Note: Make sure you keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles as well as for future system programming.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 175
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your
vehicle, you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons.
See Erasing the function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. To change or
replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed,
you must first erase the current settings. See Erasing the function
button codes later in this section.
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held
garage door opener with a
three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun
visor.
The system includes two primary
features, a garage door opener and
a platform for remote activation of devices with the home. As well as
being programmed for garage doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators, security systems, entry
door locks, and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found on-line at www.homelink.com
or by calling the toll-free help line on 1-800-355-3515.
Programming
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held transmitter. This will ensure
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Hold the garage door hand-held
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the button on
the sun visor you want to program.
Note: During programming, the
hand-held transmitter may stop
transmitting. If this occurs press
and hold the function button while you press and release the hand-held
transmitter every two seconds. The indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly once the radio frequency signal is accepted.
3. Press and hold both the button on the sun visor you want to program
and the hand-held transmitter button until the indicator light on the sun
visor changes from flashing slowly to rapidly, then release.
176
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. Press and hold the function button you programmed for 5 seconds,
then release. You may need to do this twice to activate the door. If your
garage door does not operate, observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, programming is complete. Press and
release the programmed button to activate the door.
If the indicator light on the sun visor flashes rapidly for two seconds
then turns to a constant light, follow the steps below.
Note: You may need a ladder to
reach the unit and you may need to
remove the cover or lamp lens.
1. Press the learn button on the
garage door opener motor.
Note: You will have 30 seconds to
complete the next step.
2. Return to your car.
3. Press and hold the function
button you want to program for
2 seconds, then release. Repeat this
step. Depending on the brand of
garage door opener you may need
to repeat this sequence a third time.
To program additional buttons repeat steps one through four.
For questions or comments, please contact HomeLink威 at
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual
buttons.
1. Press and hold the outer two
function buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons
flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash,
release the buttons. The codes for
all buttons are erased.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 177
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Reprogramming a single button
To program a device to a previously trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the button, follow Step 1 in the Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming HomeLink姞 to a Genie Intellicode姞 2 garage door
opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode威 2 transmitter must already be programmed
to operate with the garage door opener.
Programing the transmitters
To program HomeLink威 to the transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode. To do this
A. Red LED
B. Green LED
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for
10 seconds. The LED light will change from green to green and red.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change to Programming
mode. If done properly the LED light will appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) of the
button on the sun visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button on the sun visor you want to program. The
indicator light on the sun visor will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
BA
178
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: the Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. If
HomeLink威 does not program within 30 seconds the Genie transmitter
will need to be pressed again. If the Genie transmitter LED displays
green and red, release the button until the LED turns off before pressing
the button again.
Once HomeLink威 has been programmed successfully, the Genie
transmitter must be changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The indicator light will change
from red to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. If done correctly
the LED will turn green.
Programming HomeLink姞 to the Genie Intellicode姞 garage door
opener motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the garage door opener motor.
To program HomeLink威 to the
garage door opener motor.
1. Press and hold the PROGRAM
button on the garage door opener
motor until both blue LED’s turn on.
2. Release the PROGRAM button.
Only the smaller round LED should
be on.
3. Press and release the program button. The larger purple LED will
flash
Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s
previously programmed button. Both indicator lights on the garage door
opener motor unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously programmed button on the sun visor for
2 seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
At this point, programming is complete.
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped) 179
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Clearing a HomeLink姞 device
To erase programming from the three HomeLink威 buttons, press and
hold the two outer HomeLink威 buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash. The LED will begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which time
both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased, and
the led should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when
any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance can void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
180
Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUXILIARY POWER POINTS
WARNING: Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter socket (if equipped). Improper use of the lighter
can cause damage not covered by your warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: If used when the engine is not running, the battery will discharge.
There may be insufficient power to restart your engine.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an accessory plug into the power
point. This will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the vehicle capacity of 12 volt
DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigarette lighter
element.
Note: Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use.
Run the engine for full capacity use of the power point. To prevent the
battery from being discharged:
• Do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is
not running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is
parked for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be found:
• by the passenger’s ankle near the floor on the front console
• on the rear of the center console
• on the right rear quarter panel.
Auxiliary Power Points 181
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the
powerpoint whenever the device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power point, since it will defeat
the safety protection design. Doing so my cause the powerpoint to
overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the
150 watt load limit and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The cap should always be closed whenever the power point outlet
is not in use.
Note: The power point will turn off after 13 minutes if the ignition is on
without the engine running. Keep the engine running to use the power
point.
The 110 volt AC power point outlet is used for powering electrical
devices that require up to 150 watt. Exceeding the 150 watt limit will
cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide
overload protection.
The power point is located on the
back of the center console.
The power point is not designed for the following electric appliances;
they may not work properly:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners, electric saws and other electric
power tools, compressor-driven refrigerators, etc.
• Measuring devices, which process precise data, such as medical
equipment, measuring equipment, etc.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply:
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.
182 Auxiliary Power Points
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded,
overheated, or shorted. Unplug your device and turn the ignition off then
on for overloading and shorting conditions. Let the system cool off, then
turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition.
The power point can provide power whenever the ignition is on and the
indicator light is on. The indicator light is located in the top left corner
of the power point.
When the indicator light is:
• on — power point is ready to supply power
• off — power point power supply is off; ignition is not on
• blinking — power point is in fault mode
Auxiliary Power Points 183
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CENTER CONSOLE
WARNING: Use only soft cups in the cupholder. Hard objects
can injure you in a collision.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
1. Cupholders
2. Utility compartment, coin holder
slots, tissue box holder, audio input
jack and USB port (if equipped)
3. Power point, rear climate
controls, rear audio controls (if
equipped), rear heated seat controls
(if equipped) and 110V AC power
point (if equipped)
4. Rear cupholders
5. Side storage
OVERHEAD CONSOLE (IF EQUIPPED)
The appearance of the overhead console will vary according to your
option package.
Press near the rear edge of the door
to open it.
A
B
C
D
E
184 Storage Compartments
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce
very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire or other damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle on dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in
other enclosed areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized dealer immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8 kilometers) after you
connect it. This is because the engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You may disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all Canadian interference-causing
equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field
strength of radio noise.
When starting your vehicle, avoid pressing the accelerator pedal before
and during operation. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have
difficulty starting the engine.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 185
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IGNITION SWITCH
Note: To switch the engine off when your vehicle is moving, move the
transmission selector lever to position N. Use the brakes to bring your
vehicle to a safe stop. After your vehicle has stopped, switch the engine
off and move the transmission selector lever to position P. Turn the key
to the accessory or off position.
Note: Do not store the key in the ignition after the vehicle is turned off
and you have left the vehicle. This could cause a drain on the battery.
A. Off: The ignition is off.
B. Accessory: Allows the electrical accessories, such as the radio, to
operate while the engine is not running.
C. On: All the electrical circuits are operational. Warning lights are
illuminated. This is the key position when driving.
D. Start: Cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked.
Before starting the vehicle:
• Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in position P.
• Turn the key to on without turning the key to start.
Some warning lights briefly illuminate.
C
D
B
A
186 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Select position P or N.
3. Turn the key to start the engine. The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until the vehicle starts.
Note: If the engine does not start on the first try, wait for a short period
of time and try again.
If you have difficulty starting the engine when the temperature is below
-13°F (-25°C), press the accelerator pedal slightly and try again.
If the engine does not start after three attempts, wait 10 seconds and
follow this flooded engine procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and hold it there.
3. Select position P or N.
4. Start the engine.
Cold Weather Starting (Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
The starting characteristics of all grades of E-85 ethanol make it
unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C).
Consult your fuel distributor for the availability of winter grade ethanol.
As the outside temperature approaches freezing, ethanol fuel distributors
should supply winter grade ethanol (same as with unleaded gasoline). If
summer grade ethanol is used in cold weather conditions, 0°F to 32°F
(-18°C to 0°C), you may experience increased cranking times, rough idle
or hesitation until the engine has warmed up.
You may experience a decrease in peak performance when the engine is
cold when operating on E-85 ethanol.
Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time as starter
damage may occur. If the engine fails to start, turn the key to off and
wait 30 seconds before trying again.
Do not use starting fluid such as ether in the air intake system. Such
fluid could cause immediate explosive damage to the engine and possible
personal injury.
If you should experience cold weather starting problems on E-85
ethanol, and neither an alternative brand of E-85 ethanol nor an engine
block heater is available, the addition of unleaded gasoline to your tank
improves cold starting performance. Your vehicle is designed to operate
on E-85 ethanol alone, unleaded gasoline alone, or any mixture of the
two.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 187
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the Engine Fails to Start Using the Preceding Instructions
(Flexible Fuel Vehicles Only)
1. Press and hold down the accelerator 1/3 to 1/2 way to floor, then
crank the engine.
2. When the engine starts, release the key, then gradually release the
accelerator pedal as the engine speeds up. If the engine still fails to
start, repeat Step 1.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have
this checked immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if you smell
exhaust fumes. Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take
precautions to avoid its dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and leave the engine idling for long periods of
time, we recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 centimeters).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine block heater instructions
could result in property damage or physical injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical
systems or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when outdoor temperatures are below
0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. This
allows the climate control system to respond quickly. The equipment
includes a heater element (installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A/C
electrical source.
188 Starting and Stopping the Engine
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
We recommend that you do the following for safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory or Canadian Standards Association. This
extension cord must be able to be used outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors; it could
result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the extension cord plug and the
heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. This could
cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area, clear of
combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and extension cord are firmly
connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use. Clean
them with a dry cloth, if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. The
system does not have a thermostat. It achieves maximum temperature
after approximately three hours of operation. Using the heater longer
than three hours does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.
Starting and Stopping the Engine 189
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an
overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel威 no cap fuel
system), do not refuel until the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if
misused or mishandled.
WARNING: The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can
produce static electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
WARNING: Fuel ethanol and gasoline may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut the engine off and never
allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain
conditions. Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling
your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. Fuel, such as
gasoline, is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately apparent. The toxic effects of
fuel may not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
190 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause
powertrain damage, a loss of vehicle performance, and repairs may not
be covered under warranty.
Choosing the Right Fuel
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle (FFV), then only use
UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85), diesel fuel, fuel methanol, leaded
fuel or any other fuel because it could damage or impair the emission
control system.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives.
Choosing the Right Fuel With a Flex Fuel Vehicle (If Equipped)
Note: If your vehicle is flex fuel capable, it will have a yellow bezel
placed over the fuel fill inlet.
Flex fuel vehicles are designed to use only FUEL ETHANOL
(Ed75-Ed85) fuel blends which contains 51 to 83% ethanol and
UNLEADED FUEL “Regular” unleaded gasoline or any mixture of the
two fuels.
Fuel and Refueling 191
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
It is best not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If you do
switch fuels, it is recommended that you add as much fuel as
possible—at least half a tank. Do not add less than five gallons (18.9L)
when refueling. You should drive the vehicle immediately after refueling
for at least 5 miles (8 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to the change in
ethanol concentration. If you exclusively use E85 fuel, it is recommended
to fill the fuel tank with regular unleaded gasoline at each scheduled oil
change.
Octane Recommendations
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with a
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87
is recommended. Some stations
offer fuels posted as “Regular” with
an octane rating below 87,
particularly in high altitude areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87 are
not recommended.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your authorized dealer to
prevent any engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
effect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine. On restarting, cranking time will take a few seconds longer
than normal.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8L) of fuel is enough to restart the
engine. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade, more than
1 gallon (3.8L) may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may come on. For more information
on the service engine soon indicator, refer to the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
See Settings in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on
calculating DTE (Distance to empty).
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
192 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers
or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel威 system. This could
damage the fuel system and its seal, and may cause fuel to run onto the
ground instead of filling the tank, which could result in serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel威
system with foreign objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
With the Easy Fuel威 “no cap” fuel system, use the following directions
when filling from a portable fuel container:
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a portable fuel container, use the
funnel included with the vehicle.
1. Locate the white plastic funnel. Unlatch and
remove the spare tire tool panel behind the 3rd
row seat.
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel威 system.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose
of the funnel. Do not use aftermarket funnels; they will not work with
the Easy Fuel威 system and can damage it. The included funnel has been
specially designed to work safely with your vehicle.
Fuel and Refueling 193
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REFUELING
WARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause
severe injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others:
• Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island;
• Turn off your engine when you are refueling;
• Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle;
• Keep sparks, flames and smoking materials away from fuel;
• Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle - this is against the law in some places;
•
Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel;
• Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when
filling an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
Easy Fuel姞 “No Cap” Fuel System
WARNING: The fuel system may be under pressure. If you hear
a hissing sound near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out, which could cause serious
personal injury.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the fuel door by pulling the indent on the door.
3. Insert the fuel plug key (if equipped) into the locking plug and turn it
counterclockwise to unlock it.
4. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system, and leave
the nozzle fully inserted until you are done pumping.
194 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. After you are done pumping fuel, slowly remove the fuel filler
nozzle—allow about ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the
fuel filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank
and not spill onto the vehicle.
6. Reinstall the plug (if equipped) into the fuel fill inlet and turn the key
clockwise to lock.
Note: Do not overfill the tank or fuel spillage will occur.
If the fuel fill inlet was not properly closed, a Check Fuel Fill Inlet
message may appear on the information display. See the Information
Displays chapter for more information.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Turn off the engine.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel
fill opening.
4. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel provided with the
vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and/or allow the inlet to
close properly.
If this action corrects the problem, the message may not reset
immediately. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn
off. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more
hours with the engine off) followed by city/highway driving. Continuing
to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to
turn on as well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Filling the tank
The advertised capacity is the indicated capacity and the empty reserve
combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a
full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty. Empty reserve
is the amount of fuel in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your vehicle
after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be able to refuel the
full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty
reserve still present in the tank.
Fuel and Refueling 195
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an inaccurate reading results if the
engine is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low–medium–high) each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic click–offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (this is your engine’s break-in period); a more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 miles–3,000 miles (3,200 km–4,800
km). Also, fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
not accurate ways to measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy as follows:
Standard: Divide miles traveled by gallons used.
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers traveled.
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter show how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING: Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass
or other dry ground cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and
potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer inspect your
vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
196 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with
applicable exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic
converter and other emission control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance
information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle
and to its emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft威 or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon indicator, charging system
warning light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors,
smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control
system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust
to enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust
system inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By
law, vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services,
sells, leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not
permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent
it from working. Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on
the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the
engine. This decal also lists engine displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for complete emission warranty
information.
Fuel and Refueling 197
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II). The OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists your
authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions
may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed. See Easy Fuel威
“no cap” fuel system in this chapter.
4. Driving through deep water—the electrical system may be wet.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the
electrical system dry out. After three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time the engine is started. A driving cycle
consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city/highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains on, have your vehicle
serviced at the first available opportunity. Although some malfunctions
detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine soon indicator on can result in
increased emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness, and lead to more costly repairs.
198 Fuel and Refueling
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent
you from getting a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon indicator is on or the bulb does not
work, the vehicle may need to be serviced. Refer to On-board
diagnostics (OBD-II) in this chapter.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the service engine soon
indicator is on or not working properly (bulb is burned out), or if the
OBD-II system has determined that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this case, the vehicle is considered
not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced, or the
battery has recently run down or been replaced, the OBD-II system may
indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if the
vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the ignition key to the on position
for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid, it means that
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system
during normal driving. A complete check may take several days. If the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, the following driving cycle consisting
of mixed city and highway driving may be performed:
15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by
20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle
periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete. If
the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, the above driving cycle will
have to be repeated.
Fuel and Refueling 199
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
the gearshift is latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the
LOCK position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy
or slippery conditions as the increased engine braking can cause
the rear wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the
possible loss of vehicle control.
Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing
fuel usage while coasting or decelerating. When you take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down, the torque
converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the
engine while decelerating. This fuel economy benefit may be perceived
as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from
the accelerator pedal.
This vehicle is equipped with an Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
The Adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission
operation and shift quality. When the engine is turned off, the shift data
which includes the adaptive information will be stored automatically in
the Powertrain Control Module. If the battery is disconnected for any
reason, the stored information from the last time the key was turned to
off will be read. This way, no information will be lost with any battery
removal or battery disconnect.
200 Transmission
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission
and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Press the brake pedal
• Start the engine
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. If your vehicle is
equipped with a floor-shift transmission, press the gearshift lever
release button (on the front of the lever) while shifting into the
desired gear.
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul Off
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving
position for the best fuel economy. Transmission operates in gears one
through six.
T
/
H
P
R
N
D
3
2
1
Transmission 201
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
D (Drive with Overdrive) with Tow/Haul On
The Tow/Haul feature improves
transmission operation when towing
a trailer or a heavy load. All
transmission gear ranges are
available when using Tow/Haul.
To activate Tow/Haul, press the
button on the side of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Drive with Overdrive) position; this engine
braking will slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the
vehicle when descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and
control the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator
pedal being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary
based upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will automatically
return to normal D (Drive with Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
3 (Third) (column-shift only)
Transmission operates in third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads.
2 (Second)
Transmission operates in 2nd gear only.
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads.
1 (First)
• Transmission operates in 1st gear only.
• Provides maximum engine braking.
T
/
H
T
/
H
P
R
N
D
3
2
1
202 Transmission
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in D (Drive) only.
• Press the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning
This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent
shift feel over the life of the vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This operation is considered normal
and will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time,
the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
Additionally, whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery
installed, the strategy must be relearned.
Brake-Shift Interlock – Floor-Shift Transmission
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the
brake lamps are working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure, you will be taking the
vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always fully set the parking brake
prior to doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake
warning lamp remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. See your authorized dealer.
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the on position and the brake pedal pressed, it is possible that a fuse has
blown or the vehicle’s brake lamps are not operating properly. Refer to
Fuses chapter for more information.
Transmission 203
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps are working properly, the
following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P
(Park):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the
ignition key to the off position, and
remove the key.
2. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), carefully pry off and remove
the chrome trim ring (1) from the
shifter bezel base.
3. Using a screwdriver (or similar
tool), carefully pry the trim panel
(2) up and disconnect it from the
console to expose the inside of the gearshift.
4. Locate the brake shift interlock
lever on the passenger side of the
shifter assembly.
5. Apply the brake pedal and turn the
ignition key to the on position. Using
a screwdriver (or similar tool), press
and hold the brake shift interlock
lever while pulling the gearshift lever
out of the P (Park) position and into
the N (Neutral) position.
6. Install the trim panel (2) and chrome ring (1) in reverse order.
7. Apply brake pedal, start the vehicle, and release the parking brake.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is
used.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck in Mud or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
1
2
204 Transmission
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) (if equipped)
WARNING: For important information regarding safe operation
of this type of vehicle, see General Information in the Wheels
and Tires chapter.
Note: Do not use 4X4 mode on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will
produce excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive
components. 4X4 mode is only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
Your 4x4 features the heavy-duty Control Trac威 4WD system which
includes a computer-operated transfer case. This unique system is
interactive with the road, continually monitoring and adjusting torque
delivery to the front and rear wheels to optimize vehicle control.
4WD Indicator Lights
The indicator lights illuminate in the message center in the
reconfigurable telltale (RTT) location under the following conditions.
Refer to Warning Lamps and Indicators in the Instrument Cluster
chapter.
Note: When a 4X4 system fault is present, the system will typically
remain in whichever 4X4 mode was selected prior to the fault condition
occurring. It will not default to 4X2 in all circumstances. When this
warning is displayed, have your vehicle serviced by an authorized dealer.
4X2 - Momentarily illuminates when 2H is selected.
4X4 AUTO - Continuously illuminates when 4A is selected.
4X4 - Continuously illuminates when 4H is selected.
CHECK 4X4 - Displays when a 4X4 fault is present.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 205
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4WD switch positions
WARNING: Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles.
Note: The AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 stability enhancement system can
be turned off manually by pressing the AdvanceTrac button, see the
Traction Control chapter for more information. This will disable the
engine management feature, allowing the vehicle to maintain full power
and enhanced momentum through the obstacle.
Note: The Control Trac selector switch should not be changed while the
rear wheels are slipping.
The Control Trac system functions in
three modes:
• 4X2 (2WD) delivers power to the
rear wheels only. The information
display will momentarily display
4X2 when this mode is selected. This mode is appropriate for normal
on-road driving on dry pavement and provides best fuel economy.
• 4X4 AUTO provides electronic control four-wheel drive with power
delivered to all four wheels, as required, for increased traction. The
information display will display 4X4 AUTO when this mode is selected.
This mode is appropriate for all on-road driving conditions, such as
dry road surfaces, wet pavement, snow, or gravel.
• 4X4 provides electronically locked four-wheel drive power to front and
rear wheels. The information display will display 4X4 when this mode
is selected. This mode is not recommended for use on dry pavement.
This position is only intended for severe winter or off-road conditions,
such as deep snow, ice or shallow sand.
Shifting between system modes
Note: Do not perform these operations if the rear wheels are slipping.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the system shifts or engages.
You can move the control from 2H, 4A or 4H at a stop or while driving.
The message center may display a message indicating a 4X4 shift is in
progress. Once the shift is complete the message center will then display
the system mode selected.
4X2
4X4
AUTO
4X4
206 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other Vehicles
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as
utility and four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive
vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger
cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive
cautiously could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Driving Off-Road With Truck and Utility Vehicles
Note: On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to
four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary
clunk and ratcheting sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed
and the automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a front air dam that can
become damaged (due to reduced ground clearance) when taking your
vehicle off-road. This air dam can be taken off by removing two bolts.
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 207
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case operation and shifting procedures can be
found in this chapter. Information on transfer case maintenance can be
found in the Maintenance chapter. You should become thoroughly
familiar with this information before you operate your vehicle.
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode) uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Basic Operating Principles In Special Conditions
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
208 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle gets stuck
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to
the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid over-driving your vehicle, i.e., turn
the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the
emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control, not
more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or brake
pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called
for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and/or
personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a
safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 209
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Mud and water
Note: Driving through deep water may damage the vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive slowly. Traction or brake
capability may be limited.
When driving through water, determine the depth; avoid water higher
than the bottom of the hubs (if possible) and proceed slowly. If the
ignition system gets wet, the vehicle may stall.
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest
Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help
preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by
“treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills.
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. . A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
210 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turn around because you might roll over.
It is better to back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’t be able to steer. The front wheels have to
be turning in order to steer the vehicle.
If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, apply the brakes steadily. Do not
pump the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery conditions that require
tire chains or cables, then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control
which can lead to serious injury or death. If the rear end of the vehicle
slides while cornering, steer in the direction of the slide until you
regain control of the vehicle.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped) 211
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, apply the brake steadily. Do not
pump the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for
additional information on the operation of the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS).
Maintenance and modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
212 Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous
grinding or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be
worn-out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer. If your
vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, it should be inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the wheels, even under normal
driving conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the brakes wear and does
not contribute to brake noise. See the Vehicle Care chapter for wheel
cleaning instructions.
See the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the
brake system warning light.
Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. Gently press the brake
pedal a few times when driving from a car wash or standing water to dry
the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped, apply
steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to slow your vehicle and
reduce engine power. If you experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Turn the engine off, shift to
position P and apply the parking brake, then inspect the accelerator
pedal for any interferences. If none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest authorized dealer.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops
by keeping the brakes from locking.
The ABS lamp momentarily illuminates when the ignition is
turned on. If the light does not illuminate during start-up,
remains on or flashes, the ABS may be disabled and may need
to be serviced.
If the ABS is disabled, normal braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake released,
have your brake system serviced immediately.
Brakes 213
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
When the system is operating, the brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You may also hear a noise
from the system. This is normal.
The ABS will not eliminate the dangers inherent when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you.
• your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• you take corners too fast.
• the road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the transmission selector lever is securely latched in
position P.
To set the parking brake, press the parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate and will remain illuminated
until the parking brake is released.
To release, pull the brake release lever located at the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
214 Brakes
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of
traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system applies the brakes to individual
wheels and, when needed, reduces engine power at the same time. If the
wheels spin when accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces, the system
reduces engine power in order to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
In certain situations (e.g. stuck in snow or mud), turning the traction
control off may be beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin with full
engine power. Turn off the traction control system using the TCS OFF
button located on the center of the instrument panel.
System indicator lights and messages
WARNING: If a failure has been detected within the Traction
Control System, the stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the Traction Control System was not manually disabled. If
the stability control light still illuminates steadily, have the system
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Operating your vehicle
with Traction Control disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The stability control light temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and flashes when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up and stays on when the
traction control system is turned off
or if a problem occurs in the stability system.
When the traction control system is turned off or on, a message appears
in the information display showing system status.
Traction Control 215
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications involving braking system,
aftermarket roof racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction or wheel/tire size may change the handling characteristics
of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the
AdvanceTrac威 system. In addition, installing any stereo loudspeakers
may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac威 system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the
front center console, the tunnel, and the front seats in order to
minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac威 sensors.
Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac威 system could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even advanced technology cannot
defy the laws of physics. It’s always possible to lose control of a
vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac威 system is an indication that at least
some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road; this could
reduce the operator’s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting
in a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. If
your AdvanceTrac威 system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac威 with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC威) system helps
you keep control of your vehicle when on a slippery surface. The
electronic stability control (ESC) portion of the system helps avoid skids
and lateral slides and roll stability control helps avoid a vehicle rollover.
The traction control system (TCS) helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss
of traction. For details on TCS operation, see the Traction Control
chapter.
216 Stability Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac威
with RSC威 skidding off its intended
route.
B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac威 with
RSC威 maintaining control on a
slippery surface.
USING ADVANCETRAC姞 WITH RSC姞 (IF EQUIPPED)
The system automatically activates when you start your engine. The
AdvanceTrac威 with RSC威 system cannot be completely turned off, but
the ESC and RSC威 portions of the system are disabled when the
transmission is in position R. The traction control portion of the system
can be turned off independently. See the Traction Control chapter.
Stability Control 217
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, please read and
understand the limitations of the system as contained in this
section. Sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and fixed)
objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather, air brakes, and external
motors and fans may also affect the function of the sensing system; this
may include reduced performance or a false activation.
WARNING: To help avoid personal injury, always use caution
when in R (Reverse) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: This system is not designed to prevent contact with
small or moving objects. The system is designed to provide a
warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to
avoid damaging the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects,
particularly those close to the ground.
WARNING: Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches,
bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors (located on the bumper/fascia) free from snow,
ice and large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors are covered, the
system’s accuracy can be affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper/fascia, leaving it
misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate
measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey威, it is possible to prevent
turning the sensing system off. Refer to the MyKey威 chapter.
The sensing system warns the driver of obstacles within a certain range
of the bumper area. The system turns on automatically whenever the
ignition is switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning goes away, the radio volume
returns to the previous level.
218 Parking Aids
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the Front and Rear Sensing System
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the transmission is in R (Reverse).
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the audible
warning increases. When the obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds continuously. If a stationary or
receding object is detected farther than 10 inches (25 centimeters) from
the side of the vehicle, the tone sounds for only three seconds. Once the
system detects an object approaching, the warning sounds again.
A. Coverage area of up to 6 feet
(2 meters) from the rear bumper
(with a decreased coverage area at
the outer corners of the bumper).
The system detects certain objects while the transmission is in R
(Reverse):
• and moving toward a stationary object at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h)
or less.
• but not moving, and a moving object is approaching the rear of the
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
• and moving at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of the vehicle at a speed of less than
3 mph (5 km/h).
A
Parking Aids 219
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the gearshift is in any position other
than P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h).
A. Coverage area of up to 27 inches
(70 centimeters) from the front of
the vehicle and about 6–9 inches
(15–23 centimeters) to the side of
the front end of the vehicle. Refer
to the reverse sensing section for
details on coverage area.
The system sounds an audible warning when obstacles are near either
bumper in the following manner:
• Objects detected by the front sensors are indicated by a high-pitched
tone from the front radio speakers.
• Objects detected by the rear sensors are indicated by a lower pitched
tone from the rear radio speakers.
• The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front
or rear of the vehicle. For example, if an obstacle is 12 inches (30
centimeters) from the front of the vehicle and, at the same time, an
obstacle is only 6 inches (15 centimeters) from the rear of the vehicle,
the lower pitched tone sounds.
• An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are
objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches (25
centimeters).
For specific information on the reverse sensing portion of the system,
refer to that section.
A
220 Parking Aids
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REAR VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: The rear view camera system is a reverse aid
supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum
coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to either corner of the
bumper or under the bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds
might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using the rear video camera and
the liftgate is ajar. If the liftgate is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be incorrect. All guidelines (if
enabled) have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning camera features on or off
while in R (Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a video image of the area behind
the vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display which represent your
vehicle’s path and proximity to objects behind the vehicle.
The camera is located on the
liftgate.
Parking Aids 221
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what is behind your vehicle when
you place the transmission in R (Reverse). The system uses two types of
guides to help you see what is behind your vehicle:
1. Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path the vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line, which can be helpful when backing into a
parking space or aligning the vehicle with another object behind the
vehicle.
2. Centerline: Helps align the center of the vehicle with an object (i.e. a
trailer).
Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R
(Reverse), have the system inspected by your authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees what is being towed behind
the vehicle. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually
provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow
connector is engaged.
Note: The default setting for the camera delay is off. Press the Settings
button found on the navigation screen (if equipped) to set the camera
delay feature to on or off.
Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following
conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not
operating.
• The camera’s view is obstructed by mud, water or debris. Clean the
lens with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.
222 Parking Aids
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Fixed guidelines are only available when the transmission is in R
(Reverse).
Note: The centerline is only available if fixed guidelines are on.
A. Rear bumper
B. Fixed guideline: Red zone
C. Fixed guideline: Yellow zone
D. Fixed guideline: Green zone
E. Centerline
The fixed guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel
position.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects in the red zone are closest
to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away. Objects
are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to
the yellow or red zones. Use the side view mirrors and rear view mirror
to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are FIXED and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
Navigation display
When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear
other than P (Park), the camera image remains in the display until the
vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h). This occurs when the rear
camera delay feature is on, or until a radio button is selected.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. The default setting
for the rear camera delay is OFF.
Rearview mirror display
When shifting out of R (Reverse) and into any other gear, the image in
the rearview mirror will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off
to assist in parking or trailer hookup.
A
E
D
C
B
Parking Aids 223
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot
on the accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNING: Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic or on
roads that are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Note: Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up or down a
steep hill. Apply the brakes if the vehicle speed increases above the set
speed while driving downhill.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the vehicle speed decreases more
than 10 mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while driving uphill.
The cruise controls are located on
the steering wheel.
Switching On Cruise Control
Press and release ON.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator will turn on in the instrument cluster.
RESUME
S
E
T
+
OFF ON
S
E
T
-
224 Cruise Control
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and hold SET+ or SET–. Release the button when you reach
the desired speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET–. The set speed will change in
approximately 1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator pedal or brake pedal until you reach the desired
speed. Press and release SET+.
Canceling a Set Speed
Tap the brake pedal. The set speed will not be erased.
Resuming a Set Speed
Press and release RESUME.
Switching Off Cruise Control
Note: The set speed is erased when you turn off cruise control.
Press OFF or turn off the ignition.
Cruise Control 225
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with power steering. Power steering uses energy
from the engine to decrease the driver’s effort in steering the vehicle.
To help prevent damage to the power steering pump:
• Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme right or the extreme left
for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with the power steering pump fluid level
below the MIN mark on the reservoir.
• Some noise is normal during operation. If the noise is excessive, check
for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your
authorized dealer.
• Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering
pump fluid level. Check for low power steering pump fluid level before
seeking service by your authorized dealer.
• Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on
the reservoir, as this may result in leaks from the reservoir.
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Underinflated tire(s) on any wheel(s)
• Uneven vehicle loading
• High crown in center of road
• High crosswinds
• Wheels out of alignment
• Loose or worn suspension components
226 Driving Aids
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with air suspension, turn the
air suspension and the ignition switch off prior to jacking,
hoisting or towing your vehicle.
The air suspension system is designed to improve ride, handling and
general vehicle performance during:
• Certain road conditions
• Steering maneuvers
• Braking
• Acceleration
This system keeps the rear of your vehicle at a constant level by
automatically adding air or releasing air from the springs. If you exceed
the load limit, the rear air suspension may not operate. The air
suspension system will stay active for 40 minutes after the ignition is
turned off to accommodate any load changes. (The air compressor may
run when the vehicle is off; this is normal.)
The air suspension system can be enabled or disabled through the
message center. Refer to the Information Displays chapter.
If the system is off, the rear air suspension will not operate and will not
raise (pump) or lower (vent) while the vehicle is not moving. However, if
the system determines that the vehicle is low or high and needs to make
a height adjustment while driving at speeds above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
system will pump or vent as required. Normal vehicle operation does not
require any action by the driver.
Driving Aids 227
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD CARRIERS
WARNING: When loading the roof rail crossbars, it is
recommended to evenly distribute the load, as well as maintain a
low center of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher centers of gravity,
may handle differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased stopping distance, should be taken
when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Note: The maximum recommended load is 200 pounds (90 kilograms),
evenly distributed on the crossbars.
Note: Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel. The roof
panel is not designed to directly carry a load.
For proper function of the roof rack system, loads must be placed
directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails. Your vehicle may
be equipped with factory-installed crossbars. Ford Genuine Accessory
crossbars, designed specifically for your vehicle, are also recommended
for use with your roof rack system.
Make sure that the load is securely fastened. Check the tightness of the
load before driving and at each fuel stop.
Adjusting the Crossbars (If Equipped)
1. Loosen the thumbwheels at both ends of the
crossbar by turning them counterclockwise (both
crossbars are adjustable).
2. Slide the crossbar to the desired location.
3. Tighten the thumbwheels at both ends of the
crossbar by turning them clockwise.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels are tight each time a load is
added or removed from the roof rack, and periodically while traveling.
Make sure that the load is secure before traveling.
228 Load Carrying
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading – With and Without a Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket
equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
(vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND
CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for
maximum payload. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket
or authorized-dealer installed equipment has been installed on the
vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload.
Load Carrying 229
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can
be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should
carry). Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
230 Load Carrying
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position. The total load on each axle
must never exceed its GAWR.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide provided by your authorized dealer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position.
The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
Load Carrying 231
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Example only:
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle
handling or performance, engine, transmission and/or structural
damage, serious damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal
injury.
232 Load Carrying
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR.) Separate functional brakes should be used for
safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle.
The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your authorized
dealer (or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
authorized dealer) for more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to
2,875 lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label.
Load Carrying 233
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not use replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower
the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and
GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could
result in serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lb.” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
= 650 lb.). In metric units (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, 4 of your friends and all the golf bags? You and
four friends average 220 lb. (99 kg) each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 lb. (13.5 kg) each. The calculation would be: 1400 -
(5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 lb. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (5 x
99 kg) - (5 x 13.5 kg) = 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kg.
234 Load Carrying
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• A final example for your vehicle with 1,400 lb. (635 kg) of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have been planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for
12-100 lb. (45 kg) bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity
to transport the cement to your home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 lb. (99 kg), the calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12
x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 lb. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much weight. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (12 x 45 kg) = 635 - 198 -
540 = -103 kg. You will need to reduce the load weight by at least
240 lb. (104 kg). If you remove 3-100 lb. (45 kg) cement bags, then
the load calculation would be:
1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 lb. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be: 635 kg - (2 x 99 kg) - (9 x
45 kg) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kg.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver’s seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of Pick-up Trucks and
Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, should be taken when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
Load Carrying 235
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CARGO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
A storage compartment is located in
the floor of the rear cargo area.
Lift up on the handle to open the
cover.
To close, lower the cover and press
down on the handle until the latch
clicks.
Cargo Shelf and Divider (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not load any objects on the shelf that may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of the vehicle in the case
of a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING: Do not place people or pets on or under the parcel
shelf.
Note: Do not put more than 30 pounds (14 kilograms) on the shelf.
The cargo shelf and divider is located behind the rear seat of your
vehicle and has two positions:
• A flat shelf which pivots up and snaps into place.
• A divider which pivots up and snaps vertically into place.
To move the shelf to the shelf
position: Pull up and pivot the
shelf over the channels on the side
trim panels and snap the shelf ends
in the channels.
236 Load Carrying
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To move the shelf to the divider
position: Pull up and pivot the
shelf over the channels on the side
trim panels and snap vertically in
place.
POWER DEPLOYABLE RUNNING BOARDS (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING: In extreme climates, excessive ice buildup may
occur, causing the running boards not to deploy. Be sure that the
running boards have deployed, and have finished moving before
attempting to step on them. The running boards will resume normal
function once the blockage is cleared.
WARNING: Turn off the running boards before jacking or placing
any object under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the
extended running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may
cause injury.
Note: Do not use the running boards, front and rear hinge assemblies,
running board motors, or the running board under body mounts to lift
the vehicle when jacking. Always use proper jacking points.
Note: The running boards may operate slower in cooler temperatures.
Debris such as mud, dirt and salt may become trapped in the running
board mechanism, possibly leading to unwanted noise. If this occurs,
manually set the running boards to the deployed position and flush the
system (in particular the front and rear hinge arms) with a high-pressure
car wash wand.
Load Carrying 237
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The running boards automatically
move when the doors are opened to
assist entering and exiting the
vehicle.
Automatic Power Deploy
The running boards will extend down and out when the doors are opened.
Automatic Power Stow
The running boards will return to the stowed position after a two second
delay when the doors are closed.
Manual Power Deploy
To manually operate the running boards, refer to the Information
Displays chapter.
• This feature can manually set the running boards in the deployed
(OUT) position for access to the roof.
• When running boards are manually set in the deployed position, they
will return to the stowed position and enter automatic mode when the
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
Enable and Disable
To enable and disable the power running board feature, refer to the
Information Displays chapter.
• When this feature is disabled (OFF), the running boards will move to
the stowed position regardless of the position of the doors.
• When this feature is enabled (AUTO), the running boards will move
back to the correct positions based off of the door positions.
Bounce-Back
If an object is in the way of the moving running board, it will reverse
direction and move to the end of travel.
238 Load Carrying
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended
gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could
result in engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Note: For information on electrical items such as fuses or relays, see the
Fuses chapter.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during, and after, any towing operation.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a slight takeoff vibration or
shudder may be present due to the increased payload weight. Additional
information regarding proper trailer loading and setting your vehicle up
for towing is noted under Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter and
in the RV & Trailer Towing Guide, available at your authorized dealer.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement affects the vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items so they are centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10–15% of the loaded trailer weight.
• Select a tow bar with the correct rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down, when viewed from the side.
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer sway, but reduces it once it
begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if vehicle speed is too high, the system may
activate multiple times, gradually reducing vehicle speed.
Towing 239
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
This feature applies the vehicle brakes at individual wheels and, if
necessary, reduces engine power. If the trailer begins to sway, the
stability control light flashes and the message TRAILER SWAY
REDUCE SPEED appears in the information display. The first thing to
do is slow the vehicle down, then pull safely to the side of the road and
check for proper tongue load and trailer load distribution. See the Load
Carrying chapter for specific loading information.
RECOMMENDED TOWING WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight for your vehicle configuration
listed in the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed:
• 36.5 feet
2
(3.39 meters
2
) trailer frontal area for vehicles with the
standard towing package
• 60.0 feet
2
(5.57 meters
2
) trailer frontal area for vehicles with the
optional towing package
Note: For high altitude operation, reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting at the 1000 foot (300 meter)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric trailer brakes for trailers over a
specified weight. Be sure to check state regulations for this specified
weight. The maximum trailer weights listed may be limited to this
specified weight, as the vehicle’s electrical system may not include the
wiring connector needed to activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a Class I, II , III or IV trailer provided the
maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer
weight listed for your vehicle configuration on the following chart.
2WD/4WD Tow Package Maximum GCWR - lb (kg)
2WD Standard 12000 (5443)
2WD Optional 15000 (6804)
2WD L Standard 12300 (5579)
2WD L Optional 15000 (6804)
4WD Standard 12300 (5579)
4WD Optional 15000 (6804)
4WD L Standard 12500 (5670)
4WD L Optional 15000 (6804)
240 Towing
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer. See your
scheduled maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions the rental agency
gives you.
For load specification terms found on the tire label and Safety
Compliance label and for instructions on calculating your vehicle’s load,
refer to Load limit in the Load Carrying chapter.
Remember to account for the trailer tongue weight as part of the vehicle
load when calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Hitch Cover
Your vehicle is equipped with a removable trailer hitch trim cover. To
remove the trim cover:
1. Loosen the two quarter-turn
fasteners in the bottom of the cover
by turning them counterclockwise.
Pull the cover downward to remove
it. The fasteners remain attached to
the cover.
2. To reinstall the cover, insert the
four plastic tabs on top of the cover
into the corresponding slots, as
shown in the illustration and push
the cover up into the bumper trim.
3. Hold the cover against the bumper trim and reinstall the two
quarter-turn fasteners by turning them clockwise.
Towing 241
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that clamps onto the vehicle’s bumper; use a
load-carrying hitch. You must distribute the load in your trailer so that
10–15% of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue.
WARNING: The trailer hitch on this vehicle is part of the vehicle
rear crash safety structure. Do not remove the trailer hitch.
Failure to follow this warning could compromise vehicle crash structure
and increase the risk of injury in a rear end collision.
Integrated Hitch Rating
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond the maximum tongue weight
exceeds the limit of the towing system and could result in vehicle
structural damage, loss of vehicle control and personal injury.
The standard integrated hitch has two ratings depending on mode of
operation:
• Weight-carrying requires a draw bar and hitch ball. The draw bar
supports all the vertical tongue load of the trailer.
• Weight-distributing requires an aftermarket weight-distributing
system which includes draw bar, hitch ball, spring bars and snap-up
brackets. The vertical tongue load of the trailer is distributed between
the truck and the trailer by this system.
Mode Maximum Trailer
Weight - lb (kg)
Maximum Tongue
Weight - lb (kg)
Weight-carrying 6000 (2721) 600 (272)
Weight-distributing 9000 (4082) 900 (408)
Note: These are hitch ratings only; actual vehicle ratings are dependent
on engine, transmission and axle combinations.
242 Towing
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Weight-distributing Hitch – Vehicles without Air Suspension
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Park the vehicle (without the trailer) on a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender, this is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight distributing bars
connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender a second time, this is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that
the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1
and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not level, remove the trailer, adjust
the ball height accordingly, and repeat Steps 3–6.
Weight-distributing Hitch – Vehicles with Air Suspension
WARNING: Do not adjust a weight-distributing hitch to any
position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it
was before attaching the trailer. Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause unpredictable handling, and
could result in serious personal injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a weight-distributing hitch, always use
the following procedure:
1. Turn off easy entry / kneel feature if equipped.
2. Park the vehicle, without trailer and with the ignition on, on a level
surface with all doors closed for a few minutes to ensure that the air
suspension has settled.
3. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening on the
fender, this is H1.
4. Attach the trailer to the vehicle; do not install the weight distributing
bars at this time.
Towing 243
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. With the ignition on and all doors closed, let the vehicle with trailer
sit for a few minutes to let the air suspension re-settle.
6. With the trailer connected, but without weight distributing bars
connected, measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening
on the fender a second time, this is H2.
7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distributing bars so that
the height of the front fender is approximately halfway between H1
and H2.
8. With the ignition on and all doors closed, let the vehicle, now with
trailer and weight distributing bars connected, sit for a few minutes
to let the air suspension re-settle.
9.
Re-measure the height of the top of the front wheel opening, repeating
Steps 7-9 as necessary to obtain a fender height approximately halfway
between H1 and H2 after the air suspension has settled.
10. Check that the trailer is level. If not level, remove the trailer, adjust
the ball height accordingly, and repeat Steps 4–10.
Safety Chains
Note: Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch.
To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the chains under the trailer
tongue and allow enough slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow the
chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system
directly to your vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are safe
if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at
the GVWR not GCWR.
Separate functioning brake systems are required for safe control
of towed vehicles and trailers weighing more than 1500 pounds
(680 kilograms) when loaded.
244 Towing
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Trailer Lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. Contact
your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions
and equipment for hooking up the lamps.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to get the feel of the
vehicle-trailer combination before starting on a trip. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113 km/h) during the first 500 miles
(800 kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts
thoroughly after you have traveled 50 miles (80 kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy traffic during hot weather, place
gearshift in position P to aid engine and transmission cooling and to
help A/C performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy loads or in hilly terrain. The
speed control may turn off automatically when you are towing on
long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down a long or steep hill. Do not
apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become less
effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a Grade Assist or Tow/Haul
feature, use this feature when towing. This provides engine braking
and helps eliminate excessive transmission shifting for optimum fuel
economy and transmission cooling.
• If your vehicle is equipped with AdvanceTrac™ with RSC, you may
experience AdvanceTrac™ with RSC activations during typical
cornering maneuvers with a heavily loaded trailer; this is normal.
Cornering at a slower speed while towing reduces the tendency of the
AdvanceTrac™ stability enhancement system to activate.
• If you are towing a trailer frequently in hot weather, hilly conditions,
at GCWR (or any combination of these factors), consider refilling
your rear axle with synthetic gear lubricant, if not already so
equipped. See the Capacities and Specifications chapter for the
lubricant specification.
Towing 245
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached; anticipate
stops and brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point the vehicle tires away from
traffic flow.
2. Set the vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in position P or manual
transmission in a high gear.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of the trailer wheels.
(Chocks not equipped with vehicle.)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. If the spare tire is different in size (diameter and/or width), tread
type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer other
than the road tires on your vehicle, your spare tire is considered
“temporary”. Consult information on the tire label or Safety Compliance
label for limitations when using.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer before backing the trailer into
the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer after the trailer is removed
from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 centimeters)
above the bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and reliability.
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime the rear axle has been
submerged in water. Water may have contaminated the rear axle
lubricant, which is not normally checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.
246 Towing
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WRECKER TOWING
Note: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must turn off the air
suspension control and ignition switch prior to towing. See Air
suspension in the Driving Aids chapter.
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford Motor
Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure. If the vehicle is
towed incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
Two-wheel drive (2WD) vehicles can be towed with the front wheels on
the ground (without dollies) and the rear wheels off the ground.
It is recommended that four-wheel drive (4WD) vehicles are to be towed
with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off
the ground.
Towing 247
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes disabled (without access to wheel
dollies, car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration) under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is facing forward so that it is towed in a forward
direction.
• The transmission is placed in position N. See Automatic
transmission in the Transmission chapter if you cannot move the
transmission into N.
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to
prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. See the Climate
Control chapter.
Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing.
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. These guidelines are designed to ensure that your
transmission is not damaged.
Do not tow your vehicle with any wheels on the ground as transmission
or vehicle damage may occur. It is recommended to tow your vehicle
with all four (4) wheels off the ground, such as when using a car-hauling
trailer. Otherwise, no recreational towing is permitted. See your
authorized dealer if you must flat-tow a vehicle equipped with the
Control Trac威 4WD system.
248 Towing
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for approximately 300 miles
(480 kilometers). During this time, your vehicle may exhibit some unique
driving characteristics. Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000 miles
(1600 kilometers). Vary your speed frequently and change up through
the gears early. Do not labor the engine. Do not tow during the first
1000 miles (1600 kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under and how you maintain your vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that may improve your fuel
economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth, moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
There are also some things you may not want to do because they may
reduce your fuel economy:
• Sudden or hard accelerations.
• Rev the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a trailer.
Driving Hints 249
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Carry unnecessary weight (approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for
every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Add particular accessories to your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski racks).
• Drive with the wheels out of alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note: Driving through deep water may allow water into the transmission
and engine causing internal damage. Have the fluid checked and, if water
is found, replace the fluid.
Do not drive quickly through standing water, especially if the depth is
unknown. Traction or brake capability may be limited and if the ignition
system gets wet, your engine may stall. Water may also enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine.
If driving through deep or standing
water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) or the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars).
Once through the water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop
the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by
moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
250 Driving Hints
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the
foot well of your vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed. Only use floor mats that are firmly secured to
retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
• Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that the floor mats are properly attached to the
retention posts in the carpet that are supplied with your vehicle.
Floor mats must be properly secured to both retention posts to
ensure mats do not shift out of position.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering in the vehicle foot well
that cannot be properly secured to prevent them from moving and
interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.
• Never place floor mats or any other covering on top of already
installed floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on top of vehicle
carpeting surface and not another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering will reduce the pedal
clearance and potentially interfere with pedal operation.
• Check attachment of floor mats on a regular basis. Always properly
reinstall and secure floor mats that have been removed for cleaning
or replacement.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while the vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can become
trapped under the pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
Driving Hints 251
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING (Continued)
• Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or attachment
instructions can potentially cause interference with pedal operation
causing loss of control of vehicle.
• To install floor mats, position the floor mat so that the eyelet is over
the retention post and press down to lock in.
• To remove the floor mat, reverse the installation procedure.
252 Driving Hints
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the U.S. : Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24-hours a day, seven days a week
• for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card
included in your owner’s manual portfolio.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except vehicles that have been
supplied with a tire inflation kit).
• battery jump start.
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility).
• fuel delivery – Independent Service Contractors, if not prohibited by
state, local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2.0 gallons (7.5 liters)
of gasoline or 5.0 gallons (18.9 liters) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Fuel delivery service is limited to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• winch out – available within 100 feet (30.5 meters) of a paved or
county maintained road, no recoveries.
• towing – Ford and Lincoln eligible vehicles towed to an authorized
dealer within 35 miles (56 kilometers) of the disablement location or
to the nearest authorized dealer. If a member requests to be towed to
an authorized dealer more than 35 miles (56 kilometers) from the
disablement location, the member shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 miles (56 kilometers).
Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle
requires service at the nearest authorized dealer. If the trailer is disabled,
but the towing vehicle is operational, the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles sold in the U.S. : Using roadside assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is found in the owner’s manual
portfolio in the glove compartment.
Roadside Emergencies 253
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
U.S. Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest
dealership within 35 miles (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Lincoln vehicle customers call 1-800-521-4140.
Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada : Getting Roadside Assistance
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call 1–800–665–2006.
Vehicles Sold in Canada : Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In Canada, the card is found in the warranty
information in the glove box.
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits may differ from the U.S.
coverage. Please see your warranty information or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain roadside information, call
1-800-665-2006 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel
by the radio. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will
flash.
• Press the flasher control again to turn them off.
Note: With extended use, the flashers may run down your 12 volt battery.
FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
WARNING: Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks
after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by
an authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe collision, this vehicle is equipped
with a fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the
engine. Not every impact will cause a shut-off.
254 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision, you may restart your
vehicle by doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to re-enable fuel pump.
Note: If your vehicle has the push button start system, press the
stop/start button twice to reactivate the fuel system.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: The gases around the battery can explode if exposed
to flames, sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
WARNING: Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin,
eyes and clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic transmission vehicle.
Automatic transmissions do not have push-start capability. Attempting to
push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the
transmission may exhibit a combination of firm and soft shifts. This
operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability
of the transmission. Over time, the adaptive learning process will fully
update transmission operation.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on both vehicles
and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
2. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
Roadside Emergencies 255
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of the second cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines, engine rocker
covers, the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the
positive (+) cable to the positive
(+) terminal of the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to
the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s
engine, away from the battery and
the carburetor or fuel injection
system.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at a
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
4
2
1
3
256 Roadside Emergencies
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removing the Jumper Cables
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate
the assisting (boosting) battery.
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from
the ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from
the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
4
1
3
2
Roadside Emergencies 257
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized
dealer. While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will
provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs require special training,
equipment or both, so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform
all warranty repairs. This means that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your
vehicle to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be made using Ford or
Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by
Ford.
Away from home
If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed
below to find the nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are available online at
www.lincolnowner.com
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name, City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Guides
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
258 Customer Assistance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.lincolncanada.com
Additional assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center
In order to help you serve you better, please have the following
information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the authorized dealer and city where located
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading
In some states, you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing
remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also allowed a final
repair attempt in some states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB
AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing replacement
or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This dispute
handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state created rights
or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty
Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
Customer Assistance 259
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer or
its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle
with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse
the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership of
a new vehicle or the first 18000 miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE
before asserting in court any rights or remedies conferred by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose
to seek redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act,
resort to BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer.
If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three-step
260 Customer Assistance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
procedure outlined earlier in this chapter in the Getting the services
you need section, you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and
arbitration. During mediation, a representative of the BBB will contact
both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of
the claim. If an agreement is not reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you may
participate in the arbitration process. An arbitration hearing will be
scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided
within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB. You are not
bound by the decision, and may reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line dispute, and decision, are
admissible in the court action. Should you choose to accept the BBB
AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days of receipt of your acceptance
letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the information provided below,
please call or write to request a program application. You will be asked
for your name and address, general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will be
mailed that will need to be completed, signed and returned to the BBB
along with proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will review the
claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford
Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures, or to discontinue this process at any time
without notice and without obligation.
Customer Assistance 261
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers. In those cases
where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the
authorized dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial
third party mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final as the arbitrator’s
award is binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all Canadian territories and provinces.
For more information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP
Provincial Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a regional
office or owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel. Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle
back into the U.S.
262 Customer Assistance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Asia-Pacific Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands, Central
America, the Caribbean, and Israel, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel
free to call our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD (3673).
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Puerto Rico, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford International Business Development Inc.
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 11957
Caparra Heights Station
San Juan, Puerto Rico 00922-1957
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the
Middle East, contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number for Kuwait: 24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
Customer Assistance 263
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate to any of the
above locations, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations & Global
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you, they can
direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
Customers in the U.S. should call 1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
A French owner’s manual can be obtained from your authorized dealer or
by contacting Helm, Incorporated using the contact information listed
previously in this section.
264 Customer Assistance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport
Canada, using their toll-free number: 1–800–333–0510, or online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
Customer Assistance 265
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with one that has the
specified amperage rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire.
If electrical components in the vehicle
are not working, a fuse may have
blown. Blown fuses are identified by a
broken wire within the fuse. Check
the appropriate fuses before replacing
any electrical components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey — — —
3A Violet Violet — — —
4A Pink Pink — — —
5A Tan Tan — — —
7.5A Brown Brown — — —
10A Red Red — — —
15A Blue Blue — — —
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural — Natural Natural
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A — — Orange Green Green
50A — — Red Red Red
60A — — Blue Yellow Yellow
70A — — Tan — Brown
80A — — Natural Black Black
15
266 Fuses
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery before servicing high
current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical shock, always replace the
cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your vehicle’s main electrical systems
from overloads.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, see Changing the
Vehicle Battery in the Maintenance chapter.
The high-current fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
1 — Powertrain control module relay
2 — Starter relay
3 — Blower motor relay
Fuses 267
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
4 — Trailer tow battery charge relay
5 — Fuel pump relay
6 — Electronic fan 1 relay
7 — Rear window defroster/heated
mirror relay
8 — Electronic fan 3 relay
9 — Run/start relay
10 — Rear air suspension relay
11 40A** Power running board
12 40A** Run/start relay
13 30A ** Starter relay
14 40A** Electronic fan
15 20A** Right hand high intensity
discharge headlamp relay
16 40A** Electronic fan
17 20A** Left hand high intensity
discharge headlamp relay
18 30A** Trailer brake
19 60A** Rear air suspension relay feed
20 — Not used
21 30A** Trailer tow battery charge relay
22 30A** Passenger power seat
23 — A/C clutch relay
24 — Trailer tow park lamp relay
25 — Right hand HID headlamp relay
26 — Not used
27 20A* 4x4
28 25A* Trailer tow park lamp relay
29 20A* Backup lamps, Integrated wheel
end solenoid
30 10A* A/C clutch relay
31 — Not used
268 Fuses
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
32 40A** Blower motor relay
33 40A** 110 volt AC power point
34 30A** Auxiliary blower motor
35 30A** Powertrain control module relay
36 30A** Power liftgate
37 — Trailer tow left hand stop/turn
relay
38 — Trailer tow right hand stop/turn
relay
39 — Backup lamps relay
40 — Electronic fan 2 relay
41 10A* Powertrain control module
keep-alive power
42 — Not used
43 5A* Brake on/off switch
44 20A* Fuel pump relay
45 25A* Trailer tow stop/turn lamps relay
46 — Not used
47 — Not used
48 30A** Rear air suspension module
49 — Not used
50 30A** Front wiper motor relay
51 40A** Rear window defroster/heated
mirror relay
52 10A* Anti-lock brake system run/start
feed
53 10A* Rear air suspension module
54 — Not used
55 5A* Fuel pump relay coil run/start
feed
56 30A* Passenger compartment fuse
panel run/start feed
Fuses 269
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
57 10A* Blower motor relay coil
58 15A* Trailer tow backup lamps
59 15A* Heated mirrors
60 — Not used
61 — Fuel pump diode
62 — Left high intensity discharge
headlamp relay
63 25A** Electronic fan
64 30A** Moonroof
65 20A** Auxiliary power point
(instrument panel)
66 20A** Auxiliary power point (rear of
center console)
67 40A** Front row climate controlled
seats
68 60A** Anti-lock brake system valves
69 60A** Anti-lock brake system pump
70 30A** Third row power fold seat
71 20A** Auxiliary power point/cigar
lighter
72 20A** Auxiliary power point (right rear
quarter panel)
73 — Not used
74 30A** Driver power seat
75 20A* Vehicle power 1 – powertrain
control module
76 20A* Vehicle power 2 – powertrain
control module
77 15A* Vehicle power4–ignition coils
78 — Not used
79 20A* Vehicle power 3 – powertrain
control module
270 Fuses
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protected Circuits
80 — Not used
81 — Not used
82 — Not used
83 — Not used
84 — Not used
85 — Wiper motor relay
* Mini Fuses ** Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is located under the right-hand side of the instrument
panel.
To remove the trim panel for access
to the fuse box, pull the panel
toward you and swing it out away
from the side and remove it. To
reinstall it, line up the tabs with the
grooves on the panel, then push it
shut.
To remove the fuse box cover, press in the tabs on both sides of the
cover, then pull the cover off.
To reinstall the fuse box cover, place the top part of the cover on the
fuse panel, then push the bottom part of the cover until you hear it click
shut. Gently pull on the cover to make sure it is seated properly.
Fuses 271
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The fuses are coded as follows:
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protective Circuits
1 30A Driver window
2 15A Driver side memory module
3 15A Audio rear seat controls, Satellite
radio, SYNC威
4 30A Passenger window
5 10A Keypad illumination, 3rd row seat
enable, Brake-shift interlock,
Smart fuse panel logic power
6 20A Turn signals
7 10A Low beam headlamps (left)
8 10A Low beam headlamps (right)
9 15A Interior lights
10 15A Switch backlighting, Puddle lamps
272 Fuses
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protective Circuits
11 10A Not used (spare)
12 7.5A Power mirrors, Driver seat
memory switch
13 5A Not used (spare)
14 10A Power liftgate module – keep-alive
power, Clock
15 10A Climate control, Global positioning
satellite module
16 15A Not used (spare)
17 20A Door locks, Liftgate release,
Liftglass release
18 20A Second row heated seats
19 25A Rear wiper
20 15A Adjustable pedals, Datalink
21 15A Fog lamps
22 15A Park lamps
23 15A High beam headlamps
24 20A Horn
25 10A Demand lamps, Glovebox, Visor
26 10A Instrument panel cluster
27 20A Ignition switch
28 5A Radio
29 5A Instrument panel cluster
30 5A Not used (spare)
31 10A Not used (spare)
32 10A Airbag module
33 10A Not used (spare)
34 5A Not used (spare)
35 10A Rear park assist, 4x4, Rear video
camera, 2nd row heated seats
36 5A Passive anti-theft system
37 10A Climate control
Fuses 273
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Protective Circuits
38 20A Subwoofer, THX amplifier
39 20A Radio
40 20A THX amplifier
41 15A Power windows, Power vents,
Power moonroof, Auto dimming
rear view mirror, 110 volt AC
power point
42 10A Not used (spare)
43 10A Rear wiper logic, Rain sensor
44 10A Trailer tow battery charge relay
coil
45 5A Front wiper logic
46 7.5A Climate control, Auxiliary relay
control
47 30A Circuit
Breaker
Power windows, Moonroof
48 — Delayed accessory relay
274 Fuses
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Turn off the power running boards, if equipped,
before working under the vehicle, jacking or placing any object
under the vehicle. Never place your hand between the extended
running board and the vehicle. A moving running board may cause
injury.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help maintain its roadworthiness
and resale value. There is a large network of Ford authorized dealers
that are there to help you with their professional servicing expertise. We
believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed specifically for servicing your
vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service. Check your warranty
information to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft威 parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Maintenance 275
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries, do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom of the instrument panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch that is
located under the front center of
the hood.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
B
R
A
K
E
276 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW
5.4L V8
A. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
B. Engine oil dipstick
C. Brake fluid reservoir
D. Engine coolant reservoir
E. Air filter assembly
F. Power steering fluid reservoir
G. Power distribution box
H. Engine oil filler cap
I. Battery
W
A
S
H
E
R
F
L
U
I
D
O
N
LY
A B C D
EFGHI
Maintenance 277
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A.–MIN
B. – MAX
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate
intervals for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
5. Locate and carefully remove the engine oil level dipstick. See the
Under Hood Overview in this chapter for location of dipstick.
6. Wipe the dipstick clean. Insert the dipstick fully, then remove it again.
If the oil level is between the lower and upper holes or between the MIN
and MAX marks (depending on application), the oil level is acceptable.
DO NOT ADD OIL.
If the oil level is below the lower hole or the MIN mark, add enough oil
to raise the level within the lower and upper holes or within the
MIN-MAX range.
Oil levels above the upper hole or the MAX mark may cause engine
damage. Some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized
dealer.
7. Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated.
A B
278 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the engine oil level dipstick or the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add engine oil further than the MAX mark. Oil levels above
the MAX mark may cause engine damage.
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines by the
American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this
trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC), comprised of
U.S. and Japanese automobile manufacturers.
1. Check the engine oil level.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add engine oil
that meets Ford specifications. See Capacities and Specifications for
more information. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to
pour the engine oil into the opening.
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick.
4. Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance
Information.
Note: Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The level may extend beyond the
MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below the MIN mark, or empty,
add coolant immediately. See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30 degrees Fahrenheit (-34 degrees
Centigrade) and -34 degrees Fahrenheit (-37 degrees Centigrade).
Maintenance 279
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: For best results, coolant concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use of hydrometers or coolant test
strips for measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant/antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot.
Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts.
WARNING: Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the
engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come
out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further than the MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants/additives
as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and/or heating systems.
This damage would not be covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the engine coolant may change
color from orange to pink or light red. As long as the engine coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change does not indicate the engine
coolant has degraded nor does it require the engine coolant to be
drained, the system to be flushed, or the engine coolant to be replaced.
•
DO NOT MIX different colors or types of coolant in your vehicle. Make
sure the correct coolant is used. Mixing of engine coolants may harm
your engine’s cooling system. The use of an improper coolant may harm
engine and cooling system components and may void the warranty.
280 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• In case of emergency, a large amount of water without engine coolant
may be added in order to reach a vehicle service location. In this
instance, the cooling system must be drained, chemically cleaned with
Motorcraft威 Premium Cooling System Flush, and refilled with
prediluted engine coolant as soon as possible. Water alone (without
engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion, overheating
or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants mixed with
alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol and other liquids can
cause engine damage from overheating or freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These can be
harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure will escape as you unscrew the
cap.
Add prediluted engine coolant meeting the Ford specification. See
Capacities and Specifications for more information.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough prediluted engine coolant to bring the coolant
level to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet available.
Always dispose of used automotive fluids in a responsible manner.
Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling and
disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will decrease the
overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may
cause engine damage.
Maintenance 281
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have a Ford authorized dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will provide improved overheat
protection. Engine coolant concentrations below 40% will decrease the
corrosion/freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use
prediluted engine coolant for optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine coolant temperature gauge
will move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled
cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be restarted. Take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
282 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When Fail-Safe Mode is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use during emergencies only.
Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as necessary to
bring the vehicle to rest in a safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will have limited power, will not be
able to maintain high-speed operation, and may completely shut down
without warning, potentially losing engine power, power steering assist,
and power brake assist, which may increase the possibility of a crash
resulting in serious injury.
WARNING: Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the
engine is running or hot.
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
5. Restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases
the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have a transmission fluid dipstick.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled
intervals for fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level should be checked if the
transmission is not working properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Maintenance 283
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal
operating range; there is no need to add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside
of the normal operating range, the performance of the system could be
compromised; seek service from your authorized dealer immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Check the power steering fluid. Refer to scheduled maintenance
information.
1. Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating
temperature (the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be
near the center of the normal area between H and C).
2. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Check the fluid level in the reservoir. It should be between the MIN
and MAX lines. Do not add fluid if the level is in this range.
5. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines. Be
sure to put the cap back on the reservoir. Refer to the Capacities and
Specifications chapter for the proper fluid type.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with
the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below
40°F (5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure
to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or
accident.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low. Only use a washer fluid
that meets Ford specifications. See the technical specifications chart in
the Capacities and Specifications chapter.
Note: The front and rear washer systems are supplied from the same
reservoir.
284 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE VEHICLE BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce explosive gases which
can cause personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide
proper ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive
pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the
vent caps, resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or
battery. Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries
contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against
possible splashing of acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and
get prompt medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician
immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds. Note: Wash hands after handling.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled after
the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the
vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery
performance and durability.
Maintenance 285
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft威 maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional water during its life of service.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected
from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of
time. This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• Note: If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is
eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the blade
to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or water
applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
286 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance.
To replace the wiper blades:
1. Fold back the wiper arm and
position the wiper blade at a right
angle to the wiper arm.
2. To remove the wiper blade, press
the retaining clip (A) to disengage
the wiper blade, then pull the blade
down toward the windshield to
remove it from the arm.
3. Install the new wiper blade on the arm and press it into place until a
click is heard.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and
windshield. Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning
chapter.
To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade
To replace the rear wiper blade:
1. Pull the wiper arm as far away from the glass as possible. Do not use
excessive force because it can break the wiper arm. Hold it there until
the next step.
2. Grasp the wiper blade and rotate
it away from the wiper arm using
moderate force until it disengages
from the wiper arm.
3. Once the wiper blade is loose,
slide it away from the wiper arm.
A
Maintenance 287
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. To attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm, align the cross pin and
keyway (denoted with the arrows)
and firmly press the wiper blade
into the wiper arm until an audible
snap is heard.
If you find this procedure too difficult, please see your dealer.
AIR FILTER CHECK
WARNING: To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and/or personal
burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the engine is running.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
When changing the air filter element, use only the air filter element
listed. Refer to Motorcraft威 part numbers in the Capacities and
Specifications chapter.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the appropriate intervals for
changing the air filter element.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to
the engine if the correct air filter element is not used.
288 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Changing the Air Filter Element
1. Locate the mass air flow sensor
electrical connector on the air
outlet tube. This connector will
need to be unplugged.
2. Unlock the locking clip on the
connector (connector shown from
below for clarity), then squeeze and
pull the connector off of the air
outlet tube.
3. Clean the area around the air
tube to air cover connection to
prevent debris from entering the
system and then loosen the bolt on
the air tube clamp so the clamp is
no longer snug to the air tube. It is
not necessary to completely remove
the clamp.
4. Pull the air tube off from the air
cleaner housing.
Maintenance 289
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Release the three clamps that secure
the cover to the air filter housing. Push
the air filter cover toward the center of
the vehicle and up slightly to release it.
6. Remove the air filter element
from the air filter housing.
7. Install a new air filter element.
8. Replace the air filter housing
cover and secure the clamps. Be
careful not to crimp the filter
element edges between the air filter
housing and cover and ensure that
the tabs on the edge are properly
aligned into the slots.
9. Slip the air tube onto the air
filter housing and tighten the
air-tube clamp bolt snugly, but do
not overtighten it.
10. Reconnect the mass air flow
sensor electrical connector to the
outlet tube. Make sure the locking
tab on the connector is in the
“locked” position (connector shown
from below for clarity).
290 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant.
If your vehicle has been in an accident, the alignment of your headlamps
should be checked by your authorized dealer.
Vertical Aim Adjustment
Before aim adjustment, disable the air suspension system. Refer to
Message center in the Driver Controls chapter.
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (A) 8 feet (2.4 meters)
• (B) Center height of lamp to
ground
• (C) 25 feet (7.6 meters)
• (D) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 millimeter circle on the
lens) to the ground and mark an
8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height (a piece of
masking tape works well).
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light from that lamp
hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam
will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the
horizontal reference line.
C
A
B
D
Maintenance 291
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then use a Phillips
#2 screwdriver to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise or
clockwise in order to adjust the
vertical aim of the headlamp. The
upper edge of the light pattern
should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS
NOT ADJUSTABLE.
7. Repeat Steps 3–5 for the other headlamp.
8. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product of this design. When moist air
enters the lamp assembly through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the
lens. The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during
normal operation. Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry
weather conditions.
These are examples of acceptable condensation:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens.
These are examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp
water leak):
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or streaks present on the interior of
the lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
292 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing HID Headlamp Bulbs
The low/high beam headlamps on your vehicle use a “high intensity
discharge” source. These lamps operate at a high voltage. For bulb
replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Replacing Front Parking Lamp, Turn Signal, and Side Marker Bulbs
The front parking lamp, turn signal, and side marker bulbs are located in
the headlamp assembly. Follow the same steps to replace any of these
bulbs.
1. Make sure the headlamp control is in the off position.
2. Open the hood.
3. At the back of the headlamp lens,
remove the two headlamp assembly
bolts.
4. Pull the headlamp assembly
forward slightly to expose the
electrical connectors.
5. Rotate the bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove it.
6. Pull the bulb straight out of the
socket and push in the new bulb.
7. To complete installation of the
parking lamp/turn signal assembly,
follow the removal procedures in
reverse order.
Maintenance 293
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing Fog Lamp Bulbs
1. From underneath the vehicle,
rotate the harness/bulb assembly
counterclockwise to remove it from
the fog lamp assembly.
2. Carefully disconnect the bulb
from the harness assembly via the
two snap clips.
Install the new bulb in reverse
order.
Replacing Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, and Backup Lamp Bulbs
The tail, stop, turn signal, and backup lamp bulbs are located in the
same portion of the tail lamp assembly, one just below the other. Follow
the same steps to replace any of these bulbs.
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Open the liftgate to expose the
lamp assembly screws.
3. Remove the two screws from the
lamp assembly.
4. Carefully pry the lamp assembly
away from the vehicle by pulling the
assembly directly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY SIDEWAYS.
5. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
6. Pull bulb straight out of the socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with two screws.
294 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing Supplemental Tail Lamp Bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position.
2. Open the liftgate and remove interior trim panel.
3. Remove four nuts from the lamp
assembly.
4. Carefully pry the lamp assembly
away from the vehicle by pulling the
assembly directly straight out to
expose the bulb socket. DO NOT
TIP THE LAMP ASSEMBLY
SIDEWAYS.
5. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove from lamp
assembly.
6. Pull bulb straight out of socket and push in the new bulb.
7. Install the bulb socket into the lamp assembly and rotate clockwise.
8. Install the lamp assembly on the vehicle and secure with four nuts.
9. Install the interior trim panel.
Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulbs
The license plate bulbs are located in the license plate housing assembly
on the liftgate. To change the license plate bulbs:
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the off position.
2. Remove the license lamp screw
from the assembly.
3. Pull the lamp down and twist the
bulb socket counterclockwise.
Remove the bulb socket from the
lamp.
4. Pull out the old bulb and push in
the new bulb.
5. Install the bulb socket in the lamp assembly by turning it clockwise.
6. Install the lamp assembly and secure it with the retaining screw.
Maintenance 295
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Replacing the High-Mount Brake Lamp Bulbs
To change the high-mount brake
lamp bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding
the lamp assembly in place.
2. Pull the lamp assembly straight
out.
3. Disconnect the wire harness.
4. Press the four tabs that hold the
light assembly on, one at a time,
and pull the black bulb carrier away
from the lamp.
5. Pull the old bulb out and replace
with the new bulb.
6. Snap the black bulb carrier into
the lamp assembly.
7. Connect the wire harness.
8. Install the lamp assembly with two screws.
Replacing Approach Lamp/Mirror Turn Signal Bulbs
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
296 Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to ensure
lamp performance, light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. The
correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.
Function Number of bulbs Trade number
Headlamps (low and
high-beam)
2 *See your dealer
Front park lamps 2 3157K
Front turn lamps 2 3157A (amber)
Front side marker 2 168A (amber)
Fog lamps 2 H11
Front row map lamps 2 1600XB
2nd row reading lamp 1 1600XB
Rear cargo lamp 1 211–2XB
Rear turn/tail/brake
lamps
4 3057K
Backup lamps 2 921
Supplemental tail
lamps
4 906
Approach lamps 2 906
Mirror turn signal
lamps
2 906 (amber)
License lamp 2 168
High-mount brake
lamp
5 W5W
Visor vanity lamp -
Slide on rail system
(SOR)
2 A6224PF
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your authorized dealer
* For vehicles with HID (high intensity discharge) lamps, see your
authorized dealer for service.
Maintenance 297
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products or products of equivalent
quality:
Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft威 Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft威 Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo (Canada only) (CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft威 Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft威 Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid (Canada only)
[CXC-37-(A, B, D or F)]
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-A)
Motorcraft威 Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover (U.S. only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23)
Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
pH shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
298 Vehicle Care
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle, wash
off as soon as possible.
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as
they can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
• Wash the vehicle first, using cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• Use Motorcraft威 Custom Bright Metal Cleaner. Apply the product as
you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts; allow the
cleaner to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off the haze with a clean,
dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot surfaces and do not leave
cleaning product on chrome surfaces for a period of time exceeding
that which is recommended.
• Note: Using other non-recommended cleaners can result in severe
and permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft威 Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar
Remover.
Vehicle Care 299
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WAXING
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jamb) to
your authorized dealer to make sure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles, such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout, before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft威 Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that
require cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil, spark plug wire or spark plug
well, or the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box, and air filter assembly to
prevent water damage when cleaning the engine.
300 Vehicle Care
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windows and wiper blades should be cleaned regularly. If the wipers
do not wipe properly, substances on the vehicle’s glass or the wiper
blades may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades, and
streaking and smearing of the windshield. To clean these items, follow
these tips:
• The windows may be cleaned with a non-abrasive cleaner such as
Motorcraft威 Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner.
• The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
Motorcraft威 Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate in the U.S., or
Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid in Canada. Be sure to
replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function
properly.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner
or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion, clean the outer
surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft
cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaning solution. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield
with water.
Note: Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause damage
to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the
vehicle’s safety belts, as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with seat-mounted airbags, do
not use chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the
side airbag in a collision.
Vehicle Care 301
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts and seats equipped with side
airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft威 Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft威 Spot and Stain Remover. In Canada, use Motorcraft威
Multi-Purpose Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
CLEANING THE CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom or a vacuum cleaner.
Remove fresh spots immediately. Clean the seat with a damp cloth, using
a mild soap and water solution, if necessary.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents
when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens with a clean, damp, white
cotton cloth, then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these
areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
•
Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact
with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order
to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand sanitizers to spill on interior
surfaces. If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately. Damage may not be
covered by your warranty.
302 Vehicle Care
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If a staining liquid like coffee/juice has been spilled on the instrument
panel or on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean, white cotton cloth. For more
thorough cleaning, use a mild soap and water solution. If the spot cannot
be completely cleaned by this method, the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product
to a clean, white, cotton cloth and press the cloth onto the soiled
area–allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes.
4. Remove the soaked cloth, and if it is not soiled badly, use this cloth to
clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Clean spills and stains as quickly as possible.
• For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a soft, damp cloth. For
more thorough cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap and water
solution. In Canada, use Motorcraft威 Vinyl Cleaner . Dry the area with
a soft cloth.
• If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and
water solution, the leather may be cleaned using a commercially
available leather cleaning product designed for automotive interiors.
• To check for compatibility, first test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous part of the leather.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing or
damage to the leather.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal cleaner or polish on wheels and
wheel covers.
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clear coat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft威 Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Heavy dirt and
brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse
thoroughly with a strong stream of water.
Vehicle Care 303
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Industrial-strength (heavy-duty) cleaners, or
cleaning chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove
brake dust and dirt, could wear away the clear coat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft威 Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time
(30 days or more), read the following maintenance recommendations to
make sure your vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components were engineered and tested for
reliable, regular driving. Long term storage under various conditions may
lead to component degradation or failure unless specific precautions are
taken to preserve the components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they require regular maintenance to
protect against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a thick coat of auto wax
to prevent discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the vehicle is
washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges, and latches with a light
grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents.
304 Vehicle Care
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through all the gears while the
engine is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel until the first automatic shutoff
of the fuel pump nozzle.
Note: During extended periods of vehicle storage (30 days or more),
fuel may deteriorate due to oxidation. Add a quality gas stabilizer
product to the vehicle fuel system whenever actual or expected storage
periods exceed 30 days. Follow the instructions on the additive label.
The vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to circulate the
additive throughout the fuel system.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing vehicle from storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system leaks, and fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days without recharging the
battery, it may be advisable to disconnect the battery cables to ensure
battery charge is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected, it will be necessary to reset
memory features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Vehicle Care 305
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and pins under vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle from Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or grease film build-up on
window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive the vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters)
back and forth to remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil and gas) to make sure there
are no leaks and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.
306 Vehicle Care
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notice to Utility Vehicle, Van and Truck Owners
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
All occupants must wear seat belts and children/infants must use
appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Utility vehicles, vans and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles, vans and
trucks are not designed for cornering
at speeds as high as passenger cars
any more than low-slung sports cars
are designed to perform satisfactorily
under off-road conditions.
Wheels and Tires 307
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) System (if equipped)
WARNING: Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD
vehicles. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate better than
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop any
faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive (when selected) has the ability
to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases traction which may
enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a
conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you to select different drive
modes as necessary. Information on transfer case operation and shifting
procedures can be found in the Transmission chapter. Information on
transfer case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance chapter.
You should become thoroughly familiar with this information before you
operate your vehicle.
On some four-wheel drive models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive
to four-wheel drive while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary
clunk and ratcheting sound. These sounds are normal as the front
drivetrain comes up to speed and is not cause for concern.
308 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
How Your Vehicle Differs from Other Vehicles
SUVs, vans and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody
components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower – to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUVs, vans and trucks
often will have a higher center of
gravity and a greater difference in
center of gravity between the
loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
Wheels and Tires 309
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck or LT type tires, tires with nominal
rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you
the following information about tire grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
310 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 139. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
Wheels and Tires 311
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 kilometers).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
312 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for service on cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not begin with a letter, this may mean it is
designated by either ETRTO (European Tire and Rim Technical
Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Wheels and Tires 313
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
owner’s manual. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
314 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Wheels and Tires 315
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
M. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post, next to the driver’s seating
position), or Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower
than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings, such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on the Tire Sidewall for LT Type
Tires
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are
described below.
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
B. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual; defined
as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
A
B
C
B
D
316 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Information on T Type Tires
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are
described below.
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size
and other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door. See the payload description and graphic in the Load
Carrying chapter.
A
B
C
D
E
Wheels and Tires 317
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long trips, inspect each tire and check
the tire pressure with a tire gauge (including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation
or blowout, with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat build-up and internal damage to the tire. It
also may result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and
not appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a
digital or dial-type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer’s
maximum permissible pressure or the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
318 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or Tire Label which is located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop
of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air pressure. The
tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T-type mini-spare tires (see the Dissimilar Spare Tire
and Wheel Assembly Information section for description): Store and
maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and dissimilar spare tires (see
the Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information section
for description): Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear
inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects
embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Wheels and Tires 319
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones, nails or glass that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check the tire and valve stems for holes, cracks, or cuts
that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace
the valve stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises and
other signs of damage or excessive wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety, tires that are damaged or show
signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires, including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 millimeters),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread will
appear on the tire when the tread is
worn down to 1/16th of an inch (2
millimeters ).
When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars,
the tire is worn out and must be replaced.
320 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage (such as
bulges in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or sidewall). If damage is observed or suspected,
have the tire inspected by a tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
WARNING: Age
Tires degrade over time depending on many factors such as
weather, storage conditions, and conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Both U.S. and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of
the tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for
safety standard certification and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured, the next two are the tire size
code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was
built. For example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After
2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in between are identification codes used for
traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Wheels and Tires 321
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire Replacement Requirements
WARNING: Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the
same size, load index, speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’s seating position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the driver’s door. If this information is
not found on these labels, then you should contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and
wheels could cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer case or power
transfer unit failure. If you have questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING: When mounting replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions
listed below. If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire wheel
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the tire
wheel assembly.
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
322 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road
tires are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels (originally installed on
your vehicle) are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do
not rapidly spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and
cause an explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns.
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road.
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking.
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove the wheel and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Wheels and Tires 323
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you are driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those with an independent rear
suspension (if equipped) may require alignment of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check
for and correct any wheel misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical
problem involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire and
wheel assembly. A dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels. If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in your
scheduled maintenance) will help your tires wear more evenly, providing
better tire performance and longer tire life.
• Rear-wheel drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four-wheel drive (4WD)
vehicles (front tires at left of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
324 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: Snow tires must be the same size, load index, speed
rating as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance
of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. Additionally, the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause steering, suspension,
axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure.
Note: The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using
snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Use only cable type chains or chains offered by Ford as an accessory
or equivalent. Other conventional link type chains may contact and
cause damage to the vehicle’s wheel house and/or body.
• Do not install chains on the front wheels as this may interfere with
suspension components.
• Chains are not recommended for use on the P275/55R20 tire.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with tire chains on your vehicle.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and retighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
Wheels and Tires 325
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system is NOT a
substitute for manually checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge.
See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain
your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure, loss of control,
vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
326 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system complies with part 15 of the FCC
rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a TPMS
Note: Each road tire is equipped
with a tire pressure sensor located
inside the tire and wheel assembly
cavity. The pressure sensor is
attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the
tire and is not visible unless the tire
is removed. Care must be taken
when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an
authorized dealer.
The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using
an accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system measures pressure in your four road
tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle. The low tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly low.
Once the light is illuminated, your tires are under-inflated and need to be
inflated to the manufacturer’s recommended tire pressure. Even if the
light turns on and a short time later turns off, your tire pressure still
needs to be checked.
When your temporary spare tire is installed
When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary
spare, the TPMS will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the
damaged road wheel/tire needs to be repaired and put back on your
vehicle.
Wheels and Tires 327
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To restore the full functionality of the tire pressure monitoring system,
have the damaged road wheel/tire repaired and remounted on your
vehicle. For additional information, see Changing tires with a TPMS in
this section.
When you believe your system is not operating properly
The main function of the tire pressure monitoring system is to warn you
when your tires need air. It can also warn you in the event the system is
no longer capable of functioning as intended. Refer to the following chart
for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system:
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Solid warning
light
Tire(s)
under-inflated
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in
this chapter.
2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located
on the edge of driver’s door or the
B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph
(32 km/h) before the light turns off.
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Tire rotation
without sensor
training
On vehicles with different front and
rear tire pressures, the TPMS must be
retrained following every tire rotation.
See Tire rotation in this chapter.
328 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Low tire
pressure
warning light
Possible cause Customer action required
Flashing warning
light
Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel/tire
and reinstall it on the vehicle to
restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system
functions, refer to When your
temporary spare tire is installed in
this section.
TPMS
malfunction
If the tires are properly inflated and
the spare tire is not in use but the
light remains on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
When inflating your tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a gas station or in your
garage), the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the
light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the recommended
inflation pressure.
How temperature affects your tire pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors tire pressure in each
pneumatic tire. While driving in a normal manner, a typical passenger
tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14 to
28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary overnight
with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi
(21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This lower
pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower
than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire pressure warning light is on,
visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more tires
are flat, repair as necessary.) Check air pressure in the road tires. If any
tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
Wheels and Tires 329
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: The use of tire sealants may damage your tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) and should not be used.
However, if you must use a sealant, the TPMS sensor and valve stem on
the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer.
WARNING: See Tire Pressure Monitoring System in this
chapter for important information. If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system indicator light will illuminate
when the spare tire is in use. To restore the full functionality of the
monitoring system, all road wheels equipped with tire pressure
monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply the brake heavily.
Instead, gradually decrease your speed. Hold the steering wheel firmly
and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage
to the TPMS sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System earlier in
the chapter. Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible.
During repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized dealer
inspect the TPMS sensor for damage.
Dissimilar Spare Tire and Wheel Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly, then it is intended
for temporary use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should
replace it as soon as possible with a road tire and wheel assembly that is
the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally
provided by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
A dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly is defined as a spare tire or
wheel that is different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires
and wheels and can be one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire
size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
330 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel: This spare tire has
a label on the wheel that states: THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FOR
TEMPORARY USE ONLY
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above, do not:
• exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the
Safety Compliance Label.
• tow a trailer.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire.
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel
location can lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
do not:
• exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• use more than one dissimilar spare tire and wheel at a time.
• use commercial car washing equipment.
• use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire and wheel.
Wheels and Tires 331
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly can lead
to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel assembly,
additional caution should be given to:
• towing a trailer.
• driving vehicles equipped with a camper body.
• driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size dissimilar spare tire and wheel,
and seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front wheels is off the ground, the
transmission alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or
slipping off the jack, even if the transmission selector lever is in
position P.
WARNING: To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you
change a tire, be sure to place the transmission selector lever in
position P, set the parking brake and block (in both directions) the
wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported
only by a jack. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
332 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to
avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack provided as original equipment
with your vehicle. If using a jack other than the one provided as
original equipment with your vehicle, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including any vehicle cargo or
modifications.
WARNING: Disable the power running boards (if equipped)
before jacking, lifting, or placing any object under the vehicle.
Never place your hand between the power running board and vehicle as
extended power running boards will retract when the doors are closed.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
Note: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
Park on a level surface, activate the hazard flashers and set the parking
brake. Then, place the transmission selector lever in position P and turn
the engine off.
Location of the spare tire and tools
The spare tire and tools for your vehicle are stowed in the following
locations:
Item Location
Spare tire Under the vehicle, just forward of
the rear bumper
Jack tools Under the access panel located in
the floor compartment behind the
rear seat
Wheels and Tires 333
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Removing the jack and tools
1. Open the liftgate, then locate the
access panel on the floor behind the
3rd row seat. Unlatch and remove
the panel.
2. Remove the jack and tools
assembly tray from the
compartment by turning the
wing-nut counterclockwise to
relieve tension against the jack
assembly tray. Remove the bag from
the jack and tool assembly tray by
loosening the strap.
Note: Pay close attention to the orientation of the bag, because it will
have to be reinstalled after changing the tire.
3. Unsnap the wheel lug nut wrench, jack extension and handle from the
plastic tray.
4. Remove the jack from the tray assembly.
Removing the spare tire
1. Remove the jack handle and
winch extension from the tray and
assemble them.
2. Open the spare tire winch access
plug in the bottom of the
compartment for the jack and tools
tray.
3. Insert the winch extension tool
assembly through the access hole in
the floor and engage the winch.
334 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
4. To remove the spare tire, turn the handle counterclockwise until the
tire is lowered to the ground and the cable is slightly slack.
5. Slide the retainer through the center of the spare tire wheel.
6. Block the wheels (both front or
both rear) on the opposite end of
the vehicle from the wheel being
changed. If on a grade, block both
wheels on the downward side of the
hill.
7. Turn off the air suspension system (if equipped). Also, turn off the
deployable running boards (if equipped). See the Driving Aids chapter.
8. Obtain the spare tire and jack tools from their storage locations.
9. Use the tip of the jack handle to remove any wheel trim.
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn counterclockwise but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground.
11. Position the jack according to
the jack locator arrows found on the
frame and turn the jack handle and
extension tool assembly clockwise.
Note: Use the frame rail as the
jacking location point, NOT the
control arm.
Wheels and Tires 335
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
12. Raise the vehicle to provide sufficient ground clearance when
installing the spare tire; approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm).
• Front
• Rear
• Jack at the specified locations to avoid damage to the vehicle.
13. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
14. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward.
15. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered.
16. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
336 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
17. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown and reinstall the wheel cover.
See Wheel Lug Nut Torque
Specifications later in this chapter
for the proper lug nut torque
specification.
18. Unblock the wheels.
19. Put flat tire, jack, lug wrench and tools away. Make sure the jack bag
is properly reinstalled around the jack and tools assembly tray with the
strap securely fastened. Be sure to tighten the wing nut sufficiently so it
does not rattle when you drive.
20. Turn on the air suspension system.
Stowing the Spare Tire
1. Lay the tire on the ground, near the rear of the vehicle, with the valve
stem side facing up.
2. Slide the wheel partially under
the vehicle and install the retainer
through the wheel center. If
equipped, you may have to remove
the wheel center cap prior to
pushing the retainer through the
center of the wheel. To remove the
center cap, press it off with the jack
tool from the inner side of the
wheel. Pull on the cable to align the
components at the end of the cable.
3. Assemble the jack handle and winch extension (as shown in
illustration), then insert the winch extension through the access hole
behind the 3rd row seat and engage the winch.
4. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the tire is raised to its stowed
position underneath the vehicle. The wrench will become harder to turn
and the spare tire winch will ratchet or slip when the tire is raised to
maximum tightness. A clicking sound will be heard from the winch
indicating that the tire is properly stowed.
5. Disassemble the jack tool and winch extension and snap them back
into the tool tray.
1
3
5
4
6
2
Wheels and Tires 337
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. Reinstall the jack bag properly around the jack and tool assembly tray,
making sure the strap is securely fastened.
7. Close the access hole with the rubber plug.
8. Reinstall the tray into the vehicle and secure it with the wing nut
(turn clockwise until tight).
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When a wheel is installed, always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting
surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or
brake disc that contacts the wheel. Ensure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with
the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the
wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in
motion, resulting in loss of control.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles
(160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel
removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
ft-lb N•m
M14 x 2.0 150 200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Note: Inspect the wheel pilot hole
and mounting surface prior to
installation. Remove any visible
corrosion or loose particles.
338 Wheels and Tires
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine 5.4L V8 Engine
Cubic inches 330
Fuel Minimum 87 octane or (E-85)
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8
Ignition system Coil on plug
Spark plug gap 0.039–0.043 inch (1.05 +/–
0.05 mm)
Compression ratio 9.8:1
Engine Drivebelt Routing
Capacities and Specifications 339
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Item Capacity Ford part name
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Brake fluid
Between MIN
and MAX on
reservoir
Motorcraft威 High Performance
DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1-C /
WSS-M6C62-A or
WSS-M6C65-A1
Hinges, latches, striker
plates and rotors, seat
tracks, fuel filler door
hinge and spring
—
Multi-Purpose Grease
(Lithium grease)
XG-4 or XL-5 or
equivalent /
ESB-M1C93-B
Lock cylinders —
Motorcraft威 Penetrating and
Lock Lubricant
XL-1 /
None
Engine coolant (Base
radiator without aux rear
heat)
1
16.4 quarts
(15.5L)
Motorcraft威 Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
•VC-3DIL-B (US)
•CVC-3DIL-B (Canada) /
WSS-M97B44-D2
Engine coolant (Heavy
duty trailer tow radiator
without aux rear heat)
1
16.9 quarts
(16.0L)
Engine coolant (Base
radiator with aux rear
heat)
1
19.0 quarts
(18.0L)
Engine coolant (Heavy
duty trailer tow radiator
with aux rear heat)
1
19.5 quarts
(18.5L)
340 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Engine oil
2,3
7.0 quarts (6.6L)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Premium Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20 Full
Synthetic Motor Oil (US)
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Super Premium Motor Oil
•Motorcraft威 SAE 5W-20
Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)
•XO-5W20-QSP (US)
•XO-5W20-QFS (US)
•CXO-5W20- LSP12
(Canada)
•CXO-5W20-LFS12
(Canada) /
WSS-M2C945-A
Automatic transmission
fluid
(6R80)
4,5
13.1 quarts
(12.4L)
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Power steering fluid
Fill between
MIN and MAX
lines on
reservoir
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 VATF
XT-5-QM /
MERCON威 V
Front axle fluid (4X4) 3.5 pints (1.7L)
Motorcraft威 SAE 80W-90
Premium Rear Axle Lube
XY-80W90-QL /
WSP-M2C197-A
Rear axle
fluid–Conventional
differential
(9.75 inch axle)
6
4.5 pints (2.1L)
Motorcraft威 SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Rear Axle Lube
XY-75W140-QL /
WSL-M2C192-A
Transfer case fluid
(4X4 ESOF)
1.6-1.8 quarts
(1.5-1.7L)
Motorcraft威 Transfer Case
Fluid
XL–12 /
ESP-M2C166-H
Transfer case fluid
(torque on demand)
1.5 quarts (1.4L)
Motorcraft威
MERCON威 LV ATF
XT-10-QLV /
MERCON威 LV
Capacities and Specifications 341
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Item Capacity Ford part name
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Windshield washer fluid Fill as required
Motorcraft威 Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate (US)
Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada)
ZC-32-A (US)
CXC-37-(A, B, D, and F)
(Canada) /
WSB-M8B16-A2/- -
Fuel tank (standard)
28.0 gallons
(106.0L)
——
Fuel tank (Navigator L)
33.5 gallons
(126.8L)
——
1
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
2
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C945-A, SAE 5W-20, and display the API Certification
mark.
3
Your engine has been designed to be used with Ford engine oil, which gives a fuel economy
benefit while maintaining the durability of your engine. Using oils other than the one specified can
result in longer engine cranking periods, reduced engine performance, reduced fuel economy and
increased emission levels.
4
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler size and
if equipped with an in-tank cooler.
5
Automatic transmissions that require MERCON威 LV should only use MERCON威 LV fluid. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information to determine the correct service interval. Use of any fluid
other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
6
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic rear axle lubricant and is considered lubricated
for life. These lubricants are not to be checked or changed unless a leak is suspected, service is
required or the axle has been submerged in water. The axle lubricant should be changed any time
the axle has been submerged in water.
342 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MOTORCRAFT姞 PART NUMBERS
Component 5.4L V8 engine
Air filter element FA-1883
Battery
BXT-65-650 or BXT-65-750
(if equipped)
Oil filter FL-820-S
Spark plugs
1
Seat filter (if equipped) FS-104
Windshield wiper blade
WW-2201-PF
WW-1601-PF (rear)
1
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Refer to
scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for
changing the spark plugs.
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft威 or equivalent
replacement parts. The customer warranty may be void for any damage
to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
Capacities and Specifications 343
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the driver side
instrument panel.
Please note that in the graphic,
XXXX is representative of your
vehicle identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) contains the following
information:
A. World manufacturer identifier
B. Brake system / Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) / Restraint
Devices and their location
C. Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
D. Engine type
E. Check digit
F. Model year
G. Assembly plant
H. Production sequence number
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
344 Capacities and Specifications
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Safety Compliance Certification
Label be affixed to a vehicle and
prescribe where the Safety
Compliance Certification Label may be
located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, the door
latch post, or the edge of the door
near the door latch, next to the
driver’s seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE DESIGNATION
You can find a transmission code on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The following table tells you
which transmission each code
represents.
Description Code
Six-speed automatic (6R80) 6
Capacities and Specifications 345
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ACCESSORIES
For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your
vehicle, please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
Accessories.Lincoln.com (U.S. only).
Lincoln Custom Accessories are available for your vehicle through your
local Lincoln or Lincoln of Canada dealer. Lincoln Motor Company will
repair or replace any properly dealer-installed Lincoln Custom
Accessories found to be defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as well as any component
damaged by the defective accessories. The accessories will be warranted
for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
•Chrome hood accent •Deflectors
•Splash guards
Interior style
•Ambient lighting •Floor mats
•Illuminated door sill plates
Lifestyle
•SUV camping tent* •Rear seat entertainment*
•Racks and carriers* •Towing accessories
•Cargo organization and management
Peace of mind
•Remote start •Vehicle security systems
• Forward bumper mounted
warning sensors*
•Wheel locks
•Locking gas plug for capless fuel system
*Lincoln Licensed Accessories are warranted by the accessory
manufacturer’s warranty. Lincoln Licensed Accessories are fully designed
and developed by the accessory manufacturer and have not been
designed or tested to Ford Motor Company engineering requirements.
346 Accessories
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Contact your Ford dealer for details regarding the manufacturer’s limited
warranty and/or a copy of the Lincoln Licensed Accessories product
limited warranty offered by the accessory manufacturer.
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your authorized dealer for
specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the amateur radio antennas in the
area of the driver’s side hood.
• Any non-Lincoln custom electrical or electronic accessories or
components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or
the owner, may adversely affect battery performance and durability,
and may also adversely affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
Accessories 347
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (U.S. ONLY)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln owners have discovered the
powerful protection of Ford ESP. It is the only extended service plan
backed by Ford Motor Company, and provides “peace of mind”
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four, new-vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your dealer for details.
PremiumCare – Our most comprehensive coverage. With over 500
covered components, this plan is so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered!
ExtraCare – Covers 113 components, and includes many high-tech
items.
BaseCare – Covers 84 components.
PowertrainCare – Covers 29 critical components.
Ford ESP is honored by all Ford and Lincoln Dealers in the U.S.
and Canada It’s the only extended service plan authorized and backed
by Ford Motor Company. That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you go.
• Factory-trained technicians.
• Ford Authorized Parts used with every covered repair.
Rental car reimbursement
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs, you are
eligible for rental car coverage, including Bumper-to-Bumper warranty
repairs, or manufacturer’s recalls.
Transferable coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires, you can
transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner. Whenever you’re
ready to sell your car, prospective buyers may feel better about taking a
risk on your used vehicle. Ford ESP may add resale value!
Plus, exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump starts.
• Out-of-fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car coverage and
emergency transportation.
348 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor – can easily exceed the
price of your Ford ESP Service Contract. With Ford ESP, you minimize
your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs.
Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle!
Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that
routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never have to worry about affording
your vehicle maintenance. It covers regular checkups, routine
inspections, preventive care and replacement of items that require
periodic attention for normal “wear”:
• Wiper blades • Brake pads and linings
• Spark plugs (except
California)
• Shock absorbers
• Clutch disc • Belts and hoses
Contact your selling Ford or Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle
and budget.
Interest free finance options available
Take advantage of our installment payment plan, just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable no interest, no-fee payment
opportunity.
Protect Yourself From the Rising Cost of Vehicle Repairs With a
Ford Extended Service Plan
To learn more, call our Ford ESP specialists at 800–367–3377, and don’t
forget to ask about our interest free payment program, allowing you all
the security and benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying over time.
You’re pre-approved with no credit checks, no hassles!
Or, mail your name, address, city, state and zip code to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068–9933
Ford Extended Service Plan 349
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle by purchasing a Ford
Extended Service Plan (ESP). Ford ESP is the only service contract
backed by Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on the
plan you purchase, Ford ESP provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and wear items
• Protection against repair costs after your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford ESP plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing and rental.
When you purchase Ford ESP, you receive added peace-of-mind
protection throughout Canada and the United States, provided by a
network of participating Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln
Maintenance Protection Plan is honored at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada and the United States are
not eligible for Ford ESP coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford of Canada dealer or
www.ford.ca to find the Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for you.
350 Ford Extended Service Plan
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or inadequate maintenance and
may also help to increase the value of your vehicle when you sell or
trade it. Keep all receipts for completed maintenance with the vehicle.
Regular maintenance intervals for your vehicle have been established
based upon rigorous testing. It is important that you have your vehicle
serviced at the proper times. These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning the vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to see that all scheduled maintenance is
performed and that the materials used meet the specifications identified
in the Capacities and Specifications chapter. Failure to perform
scheduled maintenance invalidates warranty coverage on parts affected
by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive factory-sponsored
certification training to help them become experts on the operation of
your vehicle. Ask your dealership about the training and certification
their technicians have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft姞 Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft威 and Ford-authorized branded
remanufactured replacement parts. These parts meet or exceed Ford
Motor Company’s specifications. Parts installed at your dealership carry a
nationwide, 12 month/12000 mile (20000 kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty. If you do not use Ford authorized parts, they may not
meet Ford specifications and, depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening and Saturday hours to make
your service visit more convenient and they offer one stop shopping.
They can perform any services that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours or bodyshops. Please contact
your dealer for details.
Scheduled Maintenance 351
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that will pay dividends in the form of
improved reliability, durability and resale value. To maintain the proper
performance of your vehicle and its emission control systems, it is
imperative that scheduled maintenance be completed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built with multiple, complex,
performance systems. Every manufacturer develops these systems using
different specifications and performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended maintenance intervals for
various parts and component systems based upon engineering testing.
Ford Motor Company relies upon this testing to determine the most
appropriate mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to protect your
vehicle at the lowest overall cost to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from the scheduled maintenance
information.
Ford strongly recommends the use of only genuine Ford, Motorcraft威 or
Ford-authorized remanufactured replacement parts because they are
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
Ford Motor Company recommended additives and chemicals are listed in
the owner manual and in the Ford Workshop Manual. Additional
chemicals or additives, not approved by Ford Motor Company, are not
recommended as part of normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal operating characteristic
and, by itself, does not necessarily indicate a concern or that the fluid
needs to be changed. However, discolored fluids that also show signs of
overheating and foreign material contamination should be inspected
immediately by a qualified expert, such as the factory-trained technicians
at your dealership. Your vehicle’s oils and fluids should be changed at the
specified intervals or in conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are flushed only with new fluid
that is the same as that required to fill and operate the system, or using
a Ford-approved flushing chemical.
352 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Owner Checks and Services
Certain basic maintenance checks and inspections should be performed
every month or at six month intervals.
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if
necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag, safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as
necessary.
Scheduled Maintenance 353
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right, it is important to have the
systems on your vehicle checked regularly. This can help identify
potential issues and prevent major problems. Ford Motor Company
recommends the following multi-point inspection be performed at every
scheduled maintenance interval to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point Inspection
Accessory drive belt(s) Hazard warning system operation
Battery performance Horn operation
Engine air filter Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hoses
Exhaust system Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exterior lamps operation Steering and linkage
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary Tires (including spare) for wear and
proper pressure
For oil and fluid leaks Windshield for cracks, chips or pits
Half-shaft dust boots Washer spray and wiper operation
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission, power
steering (if equipped) and window washer
Be sure to ask your dealership service advisor or technician about the
multi-point vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way to perform a
thorough inspection of your vehicle. It is your checklist that gives you
immediate feedback on the overall condition of your vehicle. You will
know what has been checked, what is okay, as well as those things that
may require future or immediate attention. The multi-point vehicle
inspection is one more way to keep your vehicle running great!
354 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Scheduled Maintenance 355
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE AND LOG
The following section contains the Normal Scheduled Maintenance. This
schedule is presented at specific mileage (kilometer) intervals with
exceptions as noted.
Normal Scheduled Maintenance
Every 7500 miles
(12000 km) or six
months (whichever
comes first)
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure
tread depth.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Perform multi-point inspection
(recommended).
Every 15000 miles
(24000 km) or
12 months (whichever
comes first)
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
brake linings, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system strength and
hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect front axle and U-joints. Lubricate if
equipped with grease fittings (4WD vehicles).
Inspect half-shaft boots.
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints,
suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
*
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
356 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Additional Maintenance Items
Every 30000 miles
(48000 km)
Replace climate-controlled (heated and
cooled) seat filter (if equipped).
Replace engine air filter.
Every 97500 miles
(156000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 105000 miles
(168000 km)
Change engine coolant.
*
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
**
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Consult dealer for requirements.
Change front axle fluid (4WD vehicles).
Change rear axle fluid.
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
Replace accessory drive belt(s) if not replaced
within the last 100000 miles (160000 km).
*
Initial replacement at six years or 105000 miles (168000 kilometers),
then every three years or 45000 miles (72000 kilometers).
**
If not replaced, inspect every 15000 miles (24000 kilometers).
Scheduled Maintenance 357
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Maintenance Schedule Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
358 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 359
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
360 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any of the following conditions,
you need to perform additional maintenance as indicated. If you
occasionally operate your vehicle under any of these conditions, it is
not necessary to perform the additional maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership service advisor or technician.
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
See axle maintenance items under
Exceptions.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
*
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Scheduled Maintenance 361
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances as in
Heavy Commercial Use (i.e., Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or
Livery)
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect brake system.
Inspect wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Lubricate control arm and steering ball joints if
equipped with grease fittings.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
Replace spark plugs.
*
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions Such as Unpaved or
Dusty Roads
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km) or six
months
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Inspect and lubricate U-joints, if equipped with
grease fittings.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
*
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
362 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Off-road Operation
Inspect frequently,
service as required
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints and
U-joints. Lubricate if equipped with grease
fittings.
Replace engine air filter.
Every 5000 miles
(8000 km)
Change engine oil and filter.
*
Inspect the wheels and related components for
abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and
measure tread depth.
Every 60000 miles
(96000 km)
Change transfer case fluid (4WD vehicles).
*
Reset your oil life monitoring system after each engine oil and filter
change. See the Instrument Cluster chapter.
Exclusive Use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles only)
Every oil change If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full
with regular unleaded fuel.
Scheduled Maintenance 363
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Special Operating Condition Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
364 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A CODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 365
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
EXCEPTIONS
Normal vehicle axle maintenance: Rear axles and power take-off
(PTO) units with synthetic fluid and light-duty trucks equipped with
Ford-design axles are lubricated for life; do not check or change fluid
unless a leak is suspected, service is required or the assembly has been
submerged in water. During long periods of trailer towing with outside
temperatures above 70°F (21°C) and at wide-open throttle for long
periods above 45 mph (72 km/h), non-synthetic rear axle fluids should
be changed every 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) or three months,
whichever comes first. This interval can be waived if the axle is filled
with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford specification
WSL-M2C192-A, part number F1TZ-19580-B or equivalent. Add friction
modifier XL-3 (EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of
Traction-Lok rear axles (see Technical specifications in the Capacities
and Specifications chapter for details).
Police/Taxi/Livery vehicle axle maintenance: Change rear axle fluid
every 100000 miles (160000 km). Rear axle fluid change may be waived
if the axle was filled with 75W140 synthetic gear fluid meeting Ford
specification WSL-M2C192-A, part number FITZ-19580-B or equivalent.
Add four ounces (118 mL) of additive friction modifier XL-3
(EST-M2C118-A) or equivalent for complete refill of Traction-Lok rear
axles. The axle fluid should be changed anytime the axle has been
submerged in water.
California fuel filter replacement: If the vehicle is registered in
California, the California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however, urges you to have all
recommended maintenance services performed at the specified intervals
and to record all vehicle service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles operating in the Middle
East, North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar climates
using an American Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline
Engines (Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal oil
change interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not available, then the oil change
service interval is 3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter replacement: Engine air filter life is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and replacement of the engine air
filter.
366 Scheduled Maintenance
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENGINE COOLANT CHANGE RECORD
Initial change Six years or 105000 miles (168000 km)
(whichever comes first)
After initial change Every three years or 45000 miles (72000 km)
Engine Coolant Change Log
DEALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
D
EALER VALIDATION:
P&A C
ODE:
RO#: H
OURS:
D
AT E:MILEAGE:
Scheduled Maintenance 367
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC is an in-vehicle communications system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and portable media player. This allows
you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist威, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic,
Directions & Information) (if equipped).
• Use applications, such as Pandora and Stitcher, via SYNC AppLink™
(if applicable).
• Access phonebook contacts and music via voice commands.
• Stream music from your connected phone.
• Text message.
• Use the advanced voice recognition system.
• USB device charging (if your device supports this).
368 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Ensure that you review your device’s user guide before using it with
SYNC.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to help you with any questions you
cannot answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST
In the United States, call: 1–888–270–1055
In Canada, call: 1–800–565–3673
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Required to activate Vehicle Health Report and to view the reports
online.
• Required to activate the subscription-based SYNC Services and to
personalize your Saved Points and Favorites.
• Essential for keeping up with the latest software downloads available
for SYNC.
• Access to customer support for any questions you may have.
Driving Restrictions
For your safety, certain features are speed-dependent and restricted
when your vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their
focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of
the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device
while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated systems when
possible and that you become aware of applicable state and local laws
that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
SYNC姞 369
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When using SYNC, do not:
• Operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Carefully place cords and cables where they cannot be
stepped on or interfere with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Leave playing devices in the vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your device’s user guide for further
information.
• Attempt to service or repair the system. See your authorized dealer.
Privacy Information
When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC, the system creates a
profile within your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. This
profile is created in order to offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text messages (read and unread),
and call history, including history of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of supported media content. The
system also records a short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity. The log profile and other system
data may be used to improve the system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and development log remain in
the vehicle unless you delete them and are generally accessible only in
the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. If you
no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle, we recommend you
perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without special equipment and access to
the vehicle’s SYNC module. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access the system data for any purpose other than as described
absent consent, a court order, or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. For further
privacy information, see the sections on 911 Assist威 (if equipped),
Vehicle Health Report (if equipped), and Traffic, Directions and
Information (if equipped).
370 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you.
Initiating a Voice Session
Push the voice icon; a tone sounds and Listening appears in the
display. Say any of the following:
Say: If you want to:
“Phone” Make calls.
“USB” Access the device connected to your USB
port.
“Bluetooth Audio” Stream audio from your phone.
“Line in” Access the device connected to the auxiliary
input jack.
“Cancel” Cancel the requested action.
“SYNC” Return to the main menu.
“Voice settings” Adjust the level of voice interaction and
feedback.
“Vehicle Health Report” Run a vehicle health report.
*
“Services” Access the SYNC Services portal.
*
“Mobile apps” Access mobile applications.
*
“Help” Hear a list of voice commands available in the
current mode.
*
If equipped, U.S. only.
System Interaction and Feedback
The system provides feedback through audible tones, prompts, questions
and spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings). You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less instruction and feedback.
The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you
learn to use the system. You can change these settings at any time.
SYNC姞 371
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Adjusting the Interaction Level
Push the voice icon; when prompted, say “Voice settings”, then
any of the following:
When you say: The system:
“Interaction mode standard” Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance.
“Interaction mode advanced” Provides less audible interaction and
more tone prompts.
The system defaults to the standard interaction mode.
Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not
sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to
your request. (For example, the system may ask “Phone, is that
correct?”) If turned off, the system simply makes a best guess as to what
you requested and you may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
“Confirmation prompts on”
“Confirmation prompts off”
The system creates candidate lists when it has the same confidence level
of several options based on your voice command. When turned on, you
may be prompted with as many as four possibilities for clarification.
For example, “Say 1 after the tone to call John Doe at home. Say 2 after
the tone to call Johnny Doe on mobile. Say 3 after the tone to call Jane
Doe at home.” Or, “Say 1 after the tone to play John Doe, Say 2 after the
tone to play Johnny Doe.”
“Phone candidate lists on”
“Phone candidate lists off”
“Media candidate lists on”
“Media candidate lists off”
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
372 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
USING SYNC WITH YOUR PHONE
Hands-free calling is one of the main features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are dependent on your cellular
phone’s functionality. At a minimum, most cellular phones with Bluetooth
wireless technology support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.
Other features, such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic
phonebook download, are phone-dependent features. To check your
phone’s compatibility, see your phone’s user manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing a Phone for the First Time
Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 2000 entries
per Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and the
transmission is in position P.
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC allows you to make and receive
hands-free calls.
1. Press the phone button; when the display indicates no phone is
paired, press OK.
2. When Add Bluetooth Device appears, press OK.
3. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
4. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
5. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display.
SYNC姞 373
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
6. The display indicates when the pairing is successful.
7. Depending on your phone’s capability and your market, the system
may prompt you with questions such as setting the current phone as
the primary phone (the phone SYNC automatically tries to connect
with first upon vehicle start-up), downloading your phone book, etc.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: To scroll through the menus, press the up and down arrows on
your audio system.
Note: Make sure the vehicle ignition and radio are turned on and that
the transmission is in position P.
1. Press the phone button and scroll until System Settings is selected.
2. Press OK and scroll until Bluetooth Devices is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll until Add Bluetooth Device is selected and press OK.
4. When Find SYNC appears in the display, press OK.
5. Put your phone into Bluetooth discovery mode. See your phone’s
user guide if necessary.
6. When prompted on your phone’s display, enter the six-digit PIN
provided by SYNC in the radio display. The display indicates when
the pairing is successful.
7. The system then prompts with questions such as if you would like to
set the current phone as the primary phone (the phone SYNC
automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up),
download your phone book, etc.
Phone Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and say “Phone”. Say any of the following:
“PHONE”
“Call <name>”
1
“Call <name> on mobile OR cell”
1
“Call <name> on other”
1
“Phone book <name> at home”
2
“Phone book <name> on mobile OR cell”
2
“Call history outgoing”
2
“Phone book <name> on Other”
2
“Call history missed”
2
“Menu”
2,3
374 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“PHONE”
“Join”
“Call <name> at home”
1
“Call <name> at work” OR “Call <name> in office”
1
“Dial”
1,4
“Phone book <name>”
2
“Phone book <name> at work” OR “Phone book <name> at office”
2
“Call history incoming”
2
“Connections”
2
“Go to privacy”
“Hold”
1
These commands do not require you to say “Phone” first.
2
These commands are not available until phone information is completely
downloaded using Bluetooth.
3
See “MENU” table below.
4
See “DIAL” table below.
“MENU”
“(Phone) connections”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification off”
*
“(Phone) settings (message) notification on”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3”
*
“(Phone) settings (set) ringer off”
*
“Battery”
“Phone name”
“Signal”
“Text message inbox”
*
Words in ( ) are optional and do not have to be spoken for the system
to understand the command.
SYNC姞 375
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC威 to access a phone book
name, number, etc., the requested information appears in the display to
view. Press the phone button and say “Call” to call the contact.
“DIAL”
“411” (four-one-one), “911” (nine-one-one), etc.
“700 (seven hundred)” (seven hundred)
“800 (eight hundred)” (eight hundred)
“900 (nine hundred)” (nine hundred)
“#” “/” (pound, slash)
“<number> 0–9”
“Asterisk” (*)
“Clear” (deletes all entered digits)
“Delete” (deletes one digit)
“Plus”
“Star”
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the phone button or press
MENU to go to the PHONE menu.
Making Calls
Press the voice icon and when prompted say:
1. Say “Call <name>” or “Dial”, then the desired number.
2. When the system confirms the number, say “Dial” again to initiate the
call.
To erase the last spoken digit, say “Delete” or press the left arrow button. To
erase all spoken digits, say “Clear” or press and hold the left arrow button.
To end the call, press and hold the phone button.
Receiving Calls
When receiving a call, you can:
• Answer the call by pressing the phone button.
• Reject the call by pressing and holding the phone button.
• Ignore the call by doing nothing.
Phone Options during an Active Call
During an active call, you have additional menu features which become
available such as putting a call on hold, joining calls, etc. Use the arrow
buttons to scroll through the menu options.
376 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To access:
1. Press MENU during an active call.
2. When Active Call Menu is selected, press OK.
3. Scroll to cycle through the following options:
When you select: You can:
Mute Call
?
Mute the call.
Privacy
Switch a call from an active hands-free
environment to your cellular phone for a more
private conversation.
Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. (The
display indicates In Privacy and the system
transfers your call.)
Call Hold
Put an active call on hold.
Press OK when Place Call on Hold? appears. To
answer another call at this time, press the phone
button.
Join Calls
Join two separate calls.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Access the desired contact through SYNC or
use voice commands to place the second call.
Once actively in the second call, press MENU.
3. Scroll until Join Calls appears and press OK.
Press OK again when Join Calls? appears.
Note: SYNC supports a maximum of three callers
on a multiparty/conference call.
Enter Tones
Enter “tones” such as numbers for passwords.
Scroll until the desired number appears in the
display, then press OK; a tone sounds as
confirmation. Repeat as necessary.
Phonebook
Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your
phonebook contacts.
2. Press OK again when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. Press the phone button.
SYNC姞 377
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Call History
Access your call history log.
1. Press OK to select, then scroll through your call
history options (incoming, outgoing or missed).
2. Press OK when the desired selection appears in
the display.
3. Press the phone button to call the selection.
Return
Exit the current menu.
Accessing Features through the Phone Menu
SYNC’s phone menu allows you to redial a number, access your call
history and phone book and send text messages as well as access phone
and system settings. You can also access advanced features, such as 911
Assist威, Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Phone Redial
Redial the last number called (if available). Press
OK to select, then press OK again to confirm.
Call History
1
Allows you to access any previously dialed,
received or missed calls while your phone has
been connected to the system.
1. Press OK to select.
2. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming, Call
History Outgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK
make your selection.
3. Press OK or the phone button to call the
desired selection.
Note: The system attempts to automatically
re-download your phone book and call history
each time your phone connects to SYNC (if the
auto download feature is on and your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports this
feature).
378 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Phonebook
1,2
Allows you to access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press OK to confirm and enter. If your
phonebook has fewer than 255 listings, they
appear alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
2. Scroll until the desired contact appears, then
press OK.
3. Press OK or the phone button.
Text Message
1
Enables you to send, download and delete text
messages.
Phone Settings
1
Allows you to view your phone’s status, set ring
tones, select your message notification, change
phone book entries and automatically download
your cellular phone among other features.
SYNC Services
3
Access the SYNC services portal where you can
request various types of information, traffic
reports and directions.
911 Assist
4
Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you
after an accident (if the feature is used properly).
Vehicle Health
Report
3
Create and receive a diagnostic report card on
your vehicle.
Mobile Apps
3
Interact with SYNC威-capable mobile applications
on your smartphone.
System Settings
Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well as
Advanced menu listings (prompts, languages,
defaults, master reset, install application and
system information).
Exit Phone Menu
Exit the phone menu by pressing OK.
1
This is a phone-dependent feature.
2
This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature.
3
If equipped, U.S. only.
4
If equipped, U.S. and Canada only.
SYNC姞 379
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text messages.
The system can also read incoming text messages to you so that you do
not have to take your eyes off the road.
Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. Your phone must support
downloading text messages using Bluetooth to receive incoming text
messages.
Note: Forwarding a text message is a speed-dependent feature and can
only be done when the vehicle is traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.
Note: Only one recipient is allowed per text message.
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the display
indicates you have a new message. You have these options:
1. Press the voice button, wait for the prompt and say “Read Message”
to have SYNC read the message to you.
2. Press OK to receive and open the text message or do nothing and
the message goes into your text message inbox. Press OK again and
SYNC reads your message aloud as you are not able to view the
message. You can then also choose whether you’d like to reply or
forward the message.
3. Press OK and scroll to choose between:
• Reply to Text Message: Press OK to access and then scroll
through the list of pre-defined messages to send.
• Forward Text Message: Press OK to forward the message to
anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. You can also choose
Enter Number.
Sending, Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages
Text messaging is a phone-dependent feature. If your phone is
compatible, SYNC allows you to receive, send, download and delete text
messages.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Text Message appears and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Send Text Message? enables you to send a new text message based on
a pre-defined set of 15 messages.
380 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Download Unread Msgs allows you to download your unread messages
(only) to SYNC. To download the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates your messages are being downloaded. When complete,
SYNC takes you to your inbox.
Delete All Messages? allows you to delete current text messages from
SYNC (not your phone). To delete the messages, press OK to select. The
display indicates when all your text messages have been deleted and
SYNC returns you to the text message menu.
Note: SYNC does not automatically download all of your unread text
messages at every ignition cycle (as it does with call history and
phonebook if automatic download is set to on).
Return exits the current menu when you press OK.
If you select Send Text Message?:
1. Press OK to select. If the system detects your phone does not
support this feature, Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC
returns to the main menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart.
3. Press OK when the desired selection is in the display. The system
now needs to know who to send the message to.
4. Scroll to cycle through Phonebook or Call History entries. You can
also select Enter Number to audibly enter a desired number.
5. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific
contact.
6. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm
when the system asks if you would like to send the message. Each
text message is sent with the following signature: “This message was
sent from my <Ford or Lincoln>”.
Pre-defined text message options
Can’t talk right now
Call me
Call you later
Be there in 10 minutes
Be there in 20 minutes
Yes
No
Why?
Thanks
Where R you?
SYNC姞 381
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Pre-defined text message options
I need more directions
I love you
Too funny
Can’t wait to see you
I’m stuck in traffic
Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your phone settings allow you to
access and adjust features such as your ring tone, text message
notification, modify your phone book and also set up automatic download.
1. Press the phone button.
2. Scroll until Phone Settings appears, then press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
When you select: You can:
Phone Status
See the provider, name, signal power, battery
power and roaming status of your connected
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to view the
information. When done, press OK again to
return to the phone status menu.
Set Ringer
Select which ring tone sounds during an
incoming call (one of the system’s or your
phone’s).
1. Press OK to select and scroll to hear
Ringer 1, Ringer 2, Ringer 3 and Phone
Ringer.
2. Press OK to select.
Note: If your phone supports in-band ringing,
your phone’s ringer sounds when Phone
Ringer is chosen.
Message Notification
Have the option of hearing an audible tone to
notify you when a text message arrives.
1. Press OK to select and scroll between
Message Notification On or Message
Notification Off.
2. Press OK to select.
382 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Modify Phonebook
Modify the contents of your phone book (i.e.,
add, delete, download). Press OK to select
and scroll between:
Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts
from your phone book. Push the desired
contact(s) on your phone. See your phone’s
user guide on how to push contacts.
Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the
current phone book and call history. When
Delete Phonebook appears, press OK to
confirm. SYNC takes you back to the Phone
Settings menu.
Download Phonebook: Press OK to select and
press OK again when Confirm
Download? appears.
Auto Download
Automatically download your phone book
each time your phone connects to SYNC.
Press OK to select. When Auto Download
On? appears, press OK to have your
phonebook automatically downloaded each
time.
Select Off to NOT download your phonebook
every time your phone connects to SYNC.
Your phonebook, call history and text
messages can only be accessed when your
specific phone is connected to SYNC.
Note: Downloading times are phone- and
quantity-dependent.
Note: When auto download is on, any
changes, additions or deletions saved since
your last download are deleted.
Return
Exit the current menu.
SYNC姞 383
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Settings
System Settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the
menu options.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect, delete and set a
phone as primary as well as turn your Bluetooth feature on and off.
The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect, delete, set a phone as primary,
and turn Bluetooth on or off.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
See Using SYNC with your phone earlier in
this chapter for pairing instructions.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
previously paired phones.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen,
then press OK to connect the phone.
Note: Only one device can be connected at a
time. When another phone is connected, the
previous one is disconnected.
Set Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary
phone.
Press OK to select and scroll to select the
desired phone. Press OK to confirm.
Note: SYNC attempts to connect with the
primary phone at every ignition cycle. When a
phone is selected as primary, it appears first
in the list and is marked with an *.
384 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Set Bluetooth On/Off
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK.
Note: Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all
Bluetooth devices and deactivates all
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired phone.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices
Delete all previously paired phones (and all
information originally saved with those
phones).
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature.
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, languages,
defaults, perform a master reset, install an application and view system
information.
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and press OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears and select OK.
4. Scroll to select from the following options:
If you select: You can:
Prompts
Get help from SYNC by using questions,
helpful hints or asking you for a specific
action. To turn these prompts on or off:
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
SYNC姞 385
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Languages
Choose between English, Espanol and
Francais. Once selected, all of SYNC’s radio
displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. If you change the
language setting, the display indicates that
the system is updating. When complete, SYNC
takes you back to the Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
Master Reset
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (phonebook, call history, text messages
and paired devices) and return to the factory
default settings.
Press OK to select. The display indicates
when complete and SYNC takes you back to
the Advanced menu.
Install Application Install applications you have downloaded.
Press OK and scroll to select. Press OK to
confirm.
System Info
Access the Auto Version number as well as
the FPN number.
Press OK to select.
MAP Profile
This is a Bluetooth component which can
further help your phone with the exchange of
text messages.
Return
Exit the current menu.
386 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC APPLICATIONS AND SERVICES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: In order for the following features to work, your cellular phone
must be compatible with SYNC. To check your phone’s compatibility, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• SYNC Services (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides access to traffic,
directions and information such as travel, horoscopes, stock prices and
more.
• 911 Assist威: Can alert 911 in the event of an emergency.
• Vehicle Health Report (if equipped, U.S. only): Provides a diagnostic
and maintenance report card of your vehicle.
•
SYNC AppLink™: Allows you to connect to and use certain applications
such as Pandora and Stitcher (if your phone is compatible).
911 Assist姞
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on prior to a
crash, the system will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk of serious injury or death
after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an emergency
call if you can do it yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time which could increase the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone in a secure location in the
vehicle so it does not become a projectile or get damaged in a
collision. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist from working properly.
Note: SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, ensure that you read the 911 Assist
privacy notice later in this section for important information.
Note: If 911 Assist is turned on or off by any user, that setting applies
for all paired phones. If 911 Assist is turned off, a voice message plays
and/or a display message/icon comes on when the vehicle is started after
a previously paired phone connects.
SYNC姞 387
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: Every phone operates differently. While SYNC 911 Assist works
with most cellular phones, some may have trouble using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag or activates the fuel pump shut-off, your
SYNC equipped vehicle may be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
For more information about 911 Assist, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca.
• For information on airbag deployment, see the Supplementary
Restraints System chapter.
• For information on the fuel pump shut-off, see the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Setting 911 Assist On
Perform the following:
1. Press the phone button to enter the Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until 911 Assist is selected.
3. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 Assist menu.
4. Scroll to select between On and Off selections.
5. Press OK when the desired option appears in the radio display. Set
On or Set Off appears in the display as confirmation.
Off selections include: Off with reminder and Off without reminder. Off
with reminder provides a display and voice reminder at phone
connection at vehicle start. Off without reminder provides a display
reminder only without a voice reminder at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working properly at the time of the
incident and throughout feature activation and use.
• SYNC 911 Assist feature must be set on prior to the incident.
• A Bluetooth-enabled and compatible phone has to be paired and
connected to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have the ability to make
and maintain an outgoing call at the time of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and be located in the U.S.,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is the emergency number.
388 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate the fuel pump shut-off
(which would activate 911 Assist); however, if 911 Assist is triggered,
SYNC tries to contact emergency services. If a connected phone is
damaged or loses connection to SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired phone and tries to make the
call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time (about 10 seconds) to cancel
the call. Failure to cancel the call results in SYNC attempting to dial
911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar message: “SYNC will attempt to
call 911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on your screen or press and
hold the phone button on your steering wheel.”
If the call is not cancelled and a successful call is made, a pre-recorded
message is played for the 911 operator, then the occupant(s) in the
vehicle is able to talk with the operator. Be prepared to provide your
name, phone number and location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist hardware was damaged in a crash.
• The vehicle’s battery or SYNC system has no power.
• The phone(s) paired and connected to the system was thrown from
the vehicle.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
Once 911 Assist is set on, it may disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or
activation of the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators the vehicle location, and/or other details about the vehicle or
crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose this information, do not turn the
feature on.
SYNC姞 389
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report
WARNING: Always follow scheduled maintenance instructions,
regularly inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for any damage or
problem you suspect. Vehicle Health Report supplements, but cannot
replace normal maintenance and vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health
Report only monitors certain systems that are electronically monitored
by the vehicle and will not monitor or report the status of any other
system, (i.e., brake lining wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your vehicle may result in vehicle
damage and serious injury.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation prior to
use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There is no fee or
subscription associated with Vehicle Health Report, but you must register
to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Before running a report, review the
Vehicle Health Report privacy notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period for your vehicle, you may not
be able to create a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle odometer has
reached 200 miles.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering, you can request a Vehicle
Health Report (inside your vehicle). Return to your account at
www.SYNCMyRide.com to view your report. You can also choose for
SYNC to automatically remind you to run reports at specific mileage
intervals. Cellular phone airtime usage may apply when reporting.
The system allows you to check your vehicle’s overall health in the form
of a diagnostic report card. The vehicle health report contains valuable
information such as:
• Vehicle Diagnostic Information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open Recalls and Field Service Actions
• Unserviced items from vehicle inspections by your authorized dealer.
390 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
You can run a report (after the vehicle has been running a minimum of
60 seconds) by pressing the voice button and saying “Vehicle health
report”, or pressing the phone button.
To run a report using the phone button:
1. Press the phone button to enter Phone Menu.
2. Scroll until Vehicle Health is selected and press OK.
3. Scroll to select from the following options:
Vehicle Health Report Options
User Preferences:
Press OK to select
and enter the menu.
Scroll to select from:
Automatic Reports: Press OK and select on
or off. Select On to have SYNC automatically
prompt you to run a health report at certain
mileage intervals. Note: You must first turn
this feature on before you can select the
mileage intervals at which you would like to
be prompted.
Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select
between 5000, 7500 or 10000 mile intervals
and press OK to make your selection.
Return: Press OK to exit the menu.
Run Report? Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of
your vehicle’s diagnostic systems and send the
results to Ford where it is combined with
scheduled maintenance information, open
recalls and other field service actions and
unserviced vehicle inspection items from your
authorized dealer.
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you run a Vehicle Health Report, Ford Motor Company may collect
your cellular phone number (to process your report request) and
diagnostic information about your vehicle. Certain versions or updates to
Vehicle Health Report may also collect additional vehicle information.
Ford may use the vehicle information it collects for any purpose. If you
do not want to disclose your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set up your Vehicle Health Report
profile at www.SYNCMyRide.com. See www.SYNCMyRide.com - Vehicle
Health Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy Statement - for more
information.
SYNC姞 391
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYNC Services: Traffic, Directions & Information (TDI)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must also have the active SYNC
Services Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired and connected to the
system in order to connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See the Using
SYNC with your phone for pairing instructions.
Note: This feature does not function properly if you have enabled caller
ID blocking on your mobile phone. Make sure your mobile phone is not
blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle, and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the
suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid.
Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations. Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if
you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed
into an area that you consider unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in roads, traffic conditions or
driving conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses GPS technology and advanced
vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle’s current location, travel direction
and speed to help provide you with the directions, traffic reports, or
business searches you request. Further, to provide the services you
request and for continuous improvement, the service may collect and
record call details and voice communications. For more information, see
SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com. If you
do not want Ford or its service providers to collect the vehicle travel
information or other information identified in the Terms and Conditions,
do not activate or use the service.
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle sensors, integrated GPS technology
and comprehensive map and traffic data, to give you personalized traffic
reports, precise turn-by-turn directions, business search, news, sports,
weather and more. For a complete list of services, or to learn more,
please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
392 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Connecting to SYNC Services Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say “Services”. This initiates an outgoing call to
SYNC Services using your paired and connected Bluetooth-enabled
cellular phone.
3. Once you are connected to the service, follow the voice prompts to
request the desired service, such as “Traffic” or “Directions”. You can
also say “What are my choices?” to receive a complete list of available
services from which to choose.
4. Say “Services” to return to the services main menu or for help, say
“Help”.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the Navigation Screen
1. Select the Phone hard button.
2. Select the SYNC Apps soft button tab.
3. Select the SYNC Services soft button to connect to SYNC Services.
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services, say “Directions” or “Business
search”. To find the closest business or type of business to your
current location, just say “Business search” and then “Search near
me”. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say
“Operator” at any time within a Directions or Business search to
speak with a live operator. You may also be prompted to speak with
an operator when the automatic system has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can assist you by searching for
businesses by name or by category, residential addresses by street
address or by name or specific street intersections. Operator Assist is
a feature of your SYNC Services subscription. For more information
on Operator Assist visit www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your destination. Once your
destination is selected, your current vehicle location is uploaded and
a route based on current traffic conditions is calculated and sent
back to your vehicle. After the route download is complete, the
phone call is automatically ended. You then receive audible and visual
driving instructions as you travel toward your destination.
3. While on an active route, you can select or say “Route summary” or
“Route status” to view the Route Summary turn list or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice guidance on or off, cancel the
route or update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks if you want the route
updated. Just say, “Yes” when prompted and a new route will be
delivered to your vehicle.
SYNC姞 393
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the phone button on the steering wheel.
2. Say “Good-bye” from the SYNC Services main menu.
SYNC Services Quick Tips
Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to
provide quicker access to your most used or
favorite information. You can save address
points such as work or home. You can also
save favorite information like sports teams or
a news category. To learn more, log onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while you
are connected to SYNC TDI Services) to
interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip
(such as a sports report), wait for the
listening tone, and say your voice command.
Portable Your subscription is associated with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone number, not
your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). You
can pair and connect your phone to any
vehicle equipped with Traffic, Directions and
Information and continue enjoying your
personalized services.
You can even access your account outside the
vehicle. Just use the number on your phone’s
call history. Traffic and Directions features do
not function properly but information services
and the 411 connect and text message
features are available.
SYNC AppLink™
Note: Your smartphone must be paired and connected to SYNC to access
AppLink.
Note: iPhone威 users need to connect the phone to the USB port in
order to start the application. It is recommended to lock your iPhone威
after starting an application.
394 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Note: The AppLink feature is not available if your vehicle is equipped
with the MyFord Touch威 or MyLincoln Touch™ system.
Depending on your display type, you can access AppLink from the media
menu, the phone menu, or by using voice commands. Once an app is
running through AppLink, you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering wheel controls.
To Access Using the Phone Menu
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
3. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
4. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
5. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s features,
such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Media Menu
1. Press the AUX button to access the SYNC menu.
2. Press the Menu button to access the SYNC Media menu.
3. Browse to Mobile Applications and press OK.
4. Browse to your desired app and press OK.
5. Once an app is running through SYNC, you can access an app’s menu
by pressing the MENU button to first access the SYNC menu.
6. Scroll until “<App name> Menu” is displayed (i.e., Pandora Menu),
then press OK. From here, you can access an application’s features,
such as Thumbs up, Thumbs down, etc. For more information, please
visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
To Access Using the Navigation Screen (If Equipped)
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the SYNC Apps tab.
3. Press Mobile Apps.
4. Select the app to start it.
To Access Using Voice Commands
1. Press the voice icon.
2. When prompted, say “Mobile Apps”.
3. Say the name of the application after the tone.
4. The app should start. While an app is running through SYNC, you can
press the voice button and speak commands specific to the app, such
as “Play Station Quickmix”. Say “Help” to discover available voice
commands.
SYNC姞 395
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USING SYNC WITH YOUR MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your digital music player over the
vehicle’s speaker system using the system’s media menu or voice
commands. You can also sort and play your music by specific categories,
such as artists, albums, etc.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player including:
iPod威, Zune™, Plays from device players, and most USB drives. SYNC
also supports audio formats such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.
Connecting Your Digital Media Player via the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a power switch, ensure that the
device is turned on.
To connect using voice commands:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press the voice icon and when prompted, say “USB”.
3. You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate voice
commands. See the media voice commands.
To connect using the system menu:
1. Plug the device into the vehicle’s USB port.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll until Select Source appears and press OK.
4. Scroll to select USB and press OK.
5. Depending on how many digital media files are on your connected
device, Indexing may appear in the radio display. When indexing is
complete, the screen returns to the Play Menu.
6. Press OK and scroll through selections of:
• Play All
• Artists
• Albums
• Genres
• Playlists
• Tracks
• Explore USB
• Similar Music
• Return
When the desired selection appears in the display, press OK to build
your desired music selection.
396 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
What’s Playing?
At any time when a track is playing, you can press the voice
icon and ask the system, “What’s playing?”. The system reads
the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you.
Media Voice Commands
Press the voice icon and, when prompted, say “USB” then any
of the following:
“USB”
“Autoplay off”
“Autoplay on”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play album <name>”
1,3
“Play all”
“Play artist <name>”
1,3
“Play genre <name>”
1,3
“Play next folder”
2
“Play next track”
“Play playlist <name>”
1,3
“Play previous folder”
2
“Play previous track”
“Play song <name>”
1
“Play track <name>”
1,3
“Refine album <name>”
1,3
“Refine artist <name>”
1,3
“Refine song <name>”
1
“Refine track <name>”
1,3
“Repeat off”
“Repeat on”
“Search album <name>”
1,3
“Search artist <name>”
1,3
“Search genre <name>”
1,3
SYNC姞 397
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“USB”
“Search song <name>”
1
“Search track <name>”
1,3
“Shuffle off”
“Shuffle on”
“Similar music”
“What’s playing?”
1
“<name>” is a dynamic listing, meaning that it could be the name of any
desired group, artist, etc.
2
Voice commands which are only available in folder mode.
3
Voice commands which are not available until indexing is complete.
Voice Command Guide
“Autoplay” Turn on to listen to music which has already
been randomly indexed during the indexing
process.
Turn off and the system does not begin to
play any of your music until all media has all
been indexed. Indexing times can vary from
device to device and also with regard to the
number of songs being indexed.
“Search/Play Genre” The system searches all the data from your
indexed music and, if available, begins to play
the chosen type of music. You can only play
genres of music which are present in the
GENRE metadata tags that you have on your
digital media player.
“Similar Music” The system compiles a playlist and then plays
similar music to what is currently playing
from the USB port using indexed metadata
information.
“Search/Play
Artist/Track/Album”
The system searches for a specific
artist/track/album from the music indexed
through the USB port.
398 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice Command Guide
“Refine” This allows you to make your previous
command more specific. For example, if you
asked to search and play all music by a
certain artist, you could then say “refine
album” and choose a specific album from the
list to view. If you then select Play, the system
only plays music from that specific album.
Press the voice icon and when prompted say “Bluetooth Audio” and then
any of the following:
“BLUETOOTH AUDIO”
“(Phone) (Media) (Bluetooth) Connections”
“Pause”
“Play”
“Play next track ”
“Play previous track ”
Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select your media source, how to play
your music (by artist, genre, shuffle, repeat, etc.), and also to add,
connect or delete devices.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll to cycle through:
When you select: You can:
Play Menu
Play your music by artist, album, genre,
playlists, tracks, similar music or to simply,
play all. You can also choose to Explore USB
to view the supported digital music files on
your playing device.
See Play Menu later in this section for more
information.
SYNC姞 399
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Select Source
SYNC USB: Press OK to access music
plugged into your USB port. You can also plug
in devices to charge them (if supported by
your device). Once connected, the system
indexes any readable media files. (The time
required to complete this depends on the size
of the media content being indexed.) If
Autoplay is on, you can access media files
randomly as they are indexed. If turned off,
indexed media is not available until the
indexing process is complete. SYNC is capable
of indexing thousands of average size media
and notifies you if the maximum indexing file
size is reached.
Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent
feature which allows you to stream music
playing on your Bluetooth-enabled phone. If
supported by your device, you can press
SEEK to play the previous or next track.
SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play
music from your portable music player over
the vehicle’s speakers.
Note: If you have already connected a device
to the USB port, you cannot access the line in
feature. Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately.
400 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Media Settings
Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and
select your Autoplay settings. Once these
selections are turned on, they remain on until
turned off. Press SEEK to play the previous
or next track.
Note: Some digital media players require
both USB and line in ports to stream data and
music separately. Press OK to select and then
scroll to choose from:
Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media
files in the current playlist. Note: To shuffle
all media tracks, you must select Play All in
the Play Menu and then select Shuffle.
Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song.
Autoplay: Press OK to listen to music which
has already been randomly indexed during
the indexing process.
Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC威-capable mobile
applications on your smart phone. See SYNC威
AppLink™ earlier in this chapter for more
information.
System Settings
Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on/off, delete) as well
as Advanced menu listings (prompts,
languages, defaults, master reset, install
application and system information).
Note: See System Settings for more
information.
Exit Media Menu
Press OK to exit the media menu.
SYNC姞 401
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessing Your Play Menu
This menu allows you to select and play your media by artist, album,
genre, playlist, track, similar music or even to explore what is on your
USB device.
1. Make sure that your device is plugged into the USB port and is
turned on.
2. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
3. Scroll to select the Play Menu and press OK.
If there are no media files to access, the display indicates there is no
media. If there are media files, you have the following options to scroll
through and select from:
When you select: You can:
Play All Play all indexed media (tracks) from your
playing device in flat file mode, one at a time
in numerical order.
Press OK to select. The first track title
appears in the display.
Artists Sort all indexed media by artist. Once
selected, the system lists and then play all
artists and tracks alphabetically. If there are
less than 255 indexed artist, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are categorized in alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to select. You can select to play
All Artists or any indexed artist.
2. Scroll until the desired artist is chosen and
press OK.
402 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Albums
Sort all indexed media by albums. If there are
less than 255 indexed albums, they are listed
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more, they are organized into alphabetical
categories.
1. Press OK to enter the album menu and
select from playing all albums or from any
individual indexed album.
2. Scroll until the desired album is chosen and
press OK.
Genres
Sort indexed music by genre (category) type.
SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file
mode. If there are more than 255, SYNC
automatically organizes them into alphabetical
categories.
Press OK to select and then scroll to select
the desired genre and press OK.
Playlists
Access your playlists (from formats such as
ASX, .M3U, .WPL, .MTP.). The system lists
your playlists alphabetically in flat file mode.
If there are more than 255, they are organized
into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired playlist and press OK.
Tracks
Search for and play a specific track which has
been indexed. SYNC lists your tracks
alphabetically in flat file mode. If there are
more than 255, SYNC automatically organizes
them into alphabetical categories.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to select the
desired track and press OK.
SYNC姞 403
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your
media device connected to the USB port. You
can only view media content which is
compatible with SYNC; other files saved are
not visible.
Press OK to select. Then scroll to explore
indexed media on your flash drive.
Similar Music Play music similar to what is currently playing
from the USB port. The system uses the
metadata information of each song to compile
a playlist for you.
Press OK to select. The system creates a new
list of similar songs and begins playing. The
metadata tags must be populated for this
feature to include each track.
Note: With certain playing devices, if your
metadata tags are not populated, the tracks
won’t be available in voice recognition, play
menu or similar music. However, if you place
these tracks onto your playing device in “Mass
Storage Device Mode”, they are available in
voice recognition, play menu browsing and
similar music. Unknowns are placed into any
unpopulated metadata tag.
Return
Exit the current menu.
System Settings
System settings provide access to your Bluetooth Devices and
Advanced menu features.
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add, connect and delete a
device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Your Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts, languages,
defaults and perform a master reset.
404 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Bluetooth Devices Menu Options
This menu allows you to add, connect and delete devices as well as turn
Bluetooth on and off.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from:
When you select: You can:
Add Bluetooth
Device
*
Allows you to pair additional devices to the
system.
1. Press OK to select and press OK again
when Find SYNC appears in the display.
2. Follow the directions in your phone’s user
guide to put your phone into discovery mode.
A six-digit PIN appears in the display.
3. When prompted on your phone’s six-digit
display, enter the PIN.
Connect Bluetooth
Device
Connect a previously paired
Bluetooth-enabled phone.
1. Press OK to select and view a list of
devices.
2. Scroll until the desired device is chosen
and press OK to connect the device.
Set Bluetooth On/Off
Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off.
Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and
Off. When the desired selection is chosen,
press OK. Turning Bluetooth off disconnects
all Bluetooth devices and deactivates
Bluetooth features.
Delete Device
Delete a paired media device.
Press OK and scroll to select the device.
Press OK to confirm.
Delete All Devices
Delete all previously paired devices.
Press OK to select.
Return
Exit the current menu.
*
This is a speed-dependent feature
SYNC姞 405
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Advanced Menu Options
This menu allows you to access settings such as prompts, language,
performing a master reset as well as returning to factory defaults.
1. Press AUX and then MENU to access the Media Menu.
2. Scroll until System Settings appears and select OK.
3. Scroll until Advanced appears.
4. Press OK and then scroll to select from the following:
When you select: You can:
Prompts
Have SYNC guide you via questions, helpful
hints or ask you for a specific action.
1. Press OK to select and scroll to select
between on or off.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display. SYNC takes you back
to the Advanced menu.
Languages
Choose from English, Francais and Espanol.
The displays and prompts are in the selected
language.
1. Press OK to select and then scroll through
the languages.
2. Press OK when the desired selection
appears in the display.
3. If you change the language setting, the
display indicates that the system is updating.
When complete, SYNC takes you back to the
Advanced menu.
Factory Defaults
Return to the factory default settings. This
selection does not erase your indexed
information (phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices).
1. Press OK to select and then press OK again
when Restore Defaults? appears in the display.
2. Press OK to confirm.
406 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Master Reset
Completely erase all information stored on
SYNC (all phonebook, call history, text
messages and all paired devices) and return
to the factory default settings.
Application Download new software applications (if
available) and then load the desired
applications through your USB port. See the
web site for more information.
Return
Exit the current menu.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However, should questions arise, see
the tables below.
Use the website at any time to check your phone’s compatibility, register
your account and set preferences as well as access a customer
representative via an online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com, www.SYNCMyRide.ca or www.syncmaroute.ca for
more information.
Phone Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
Excessive
background noise
during a phone
call.
The audio control
settings on your
phone may be
affecting SYNC
performance.
Review your phone’s user guide
regarding audio adjustments.
During a call, I
can hear the
other person but
they cannot hear
me.
Possible phone
malfunction.
Try turning off the device,
resetting the device, removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC姞 407
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
SYNC is not able
to download my
phonebook.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the website.
The system says
Phonebook
Downloaded but
my phonebook in
SYNC is empty or
is missing
contacts.
Limitations on
your phone’s
capability.
• Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using the
Add Contacts feature.
• If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
• Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated
with the missing contact.
408 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Phone Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
phone to SYNC.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Try deleting your device from
SYNC, deleting SYNC from your
device and trying again.
• Check the security and auto
accept/prompt always settings
relative to the SYNC Bluetooth
connection on your phone.
• Update your device’s software
firmware.
• Turn off the Auto phonebook
download setting.
Text messaging is
not working on
SYNC.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• Possible phone
malfunction.
• Go to the website to review
your phone’s compatibility.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
SYNC姞 409
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
USB/Media Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.
Possible device
malfunction.
• Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or removing
the device’s battery, then trying
again.
• Make sure you are using the
manufacturer’s cable.
• Make sure the USB cable is
properly inserted into the device
and the vehicle’s USB port.
• Make sure that the device
does not have an auto-install
program or active security
settings.
SYNC does not
recognize my
device when I
turn on the car.
This is a device
limitation.
Make sure you are not leaving
the device in your vehicle
during very hot or cold
temperatures.
Bluetooth audio
does not stream.
• Thisisa
phone-dependent
feature, OR
• The device is
not connected.
Make sure the device is
connected to SYNC and that you
have pressed play on your
device.
SYNC does not
recognize music
that is on my
device.
• Your music files
may not contain
the proper artist,
song title, album
or genre
information, OR
• The file may be
corrupted, OR
• The song may
have copyright
protection which
does not allow it
to play.
• Make sure that all song details
are populated.
• Some devices require you to
change the USB settings from
mass storage to MTP class.
410 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Vehicle Health Report/Services
(Traffic, Directions and Information) Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
I received a text
that the Vehicle
Health Report is
not activated.
• Your account
may not be
activated on the
website, OR
• You may have
the wrong VIN
(vehicle
identification
number) listed.
• This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
• Make sure that your VIN is
correctly listed in your account.
I am unable to
retrieve the report
on the website, or
I receive a system
error.
The preferred
dealer information
did not load
correctly.
When you register your account,
you must list a preferred dealer. If
one is already listed, try selecting
another dealer and logging out.
Log back in and change it back to
your preferred dealer and retrieve
the report.
I am unable to
submit a report.
• This could be
due to your
phone’s
compatibility, OR
• Bad signal
strength, OR
• Your phone may
not be activated
on the website.
• Update your mobile number in
your account on the website.
• Make sure you have full signal
strength and that your Bluetooth
volume level has been turned up.
• Try deleting your phone and
performing a clean pairing.
I heard a
commercial when I
tried to use
Traffic, Directions
and Information.
• The phone in
use is not
activated, OR
• Your phone has
ID blocker active.
• This is a free feature, but you
must first register online to use it.
• Turn off ID blocker on your
phone as the system recognizes
you by your phone number.
• Make sure the currently
connected phone is the same one
that is registered on your
SyncMyRide account.
SYNC姞 411
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice Command Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand what
I am saying.
• You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
• You may be
speaking too soon
or at the wrong
time.
• Review the Phone voice
commands and the Media voice
commands at the beginning of
their respective sections.
• Be aware that SYNC’s
microphone is either in your
rear view mirror or in the
headliner just above the
windshield.
SYNC does not
understand the
name of a song or
artist.
• You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
• You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
• The system
may not be
reading the name
the same way you
are saying it.
• Review the media voice
commands at the beginning of
the media section.
• Say the song or artist exactly
as listed. If you say, “Play Artist
Prince”, the system does not
play music by Prince and the
Revolution or Prince and the
New Power Generation.
• Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
“California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles”.
• If the songs are saved in all
CAPS, you have to spell them.
LOLA requires you to say, “Play
L-O-L-A”.
• Do not use special characters
in the title as the system does
not recognize them.
412 SYNC姞
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice Command Issues
Issue Possible
Cause(s)
Possible Solution(s)
SYNC does not
understand or is
calling the wrong
contact when I
want to make a
call.
• You may be
using the wrong
voice commands,
OR
• You may not be
saying the name
exactly as it is
saved, OR
• Contacts in
your phonebook
may be very short
and similar, or
they may contain
special
characters, OR
• Your
phonebook
contacts may be
saved in CAPS.
• Review the phone voice
commands at the beginning of
the phone section.
• Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as listed. For
example, if a contact is saved as
Joe Wilson, say “Call Joe
Wilson”.
• The system works better if
you list full names, such as “Joe
Wilson” rather than “Joe”.
• Do not use special characters
such as 123 or ICE, as the
system does not recognize them.
• If contacts are saved in CAPS,
you have to spell them. JAKE
requires you to say, “Call
J-A-K-E”.
SYNC姞 413
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NAVIGATION CONTROLS
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
After the system initializes, the screen is divided into two sections:
• Status bars: This is the top and bottom portion of the screen that
displays the clock or date and useful information, depending on the
current mode.
• Display area: The touchscreen changes depending on current
system operation. Buttons are displayed in this area depending on the
current screen for you to make choices.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS satellite radio, may not be available
in your location. Check with your authorized dealer.
414 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
A. Memory presets: In radio and satellite radio mode, press to access
your saved preset stations or channels.
To save a station or channel, tune to the desired station or channel, then
press and hold a preset button. The sound momentarily mutes, then
returns when the preset is saved.
B. CD/DVD slot: Insert a CD or DVD, label side up.
C. Eject: Eject a CD or DVD from the system.
D. TUNE/RPT:
• In radio or satellite radio mode, turn to advance in individual
increments up or down the frequency band to the desired station.
• In MP3 mode, turn to advance to the next or previous folder.
• In navigation mode, hear the last spoken navigation guidance prompt.
E. MAP:
• Press to access the navigation map.
• Press while the map display is active to center the map on the
current vehicle position. Press while the map display and route are
active to see the different map guidance views.
F. DEST:
• Press to access the navigation destination entry menu.
• Press while the navigation destination entry menu is active to show
additional destination entry techniques.
G. NAV:
• Press to access the navigation menu.
• Press while the navigation menu is active to see the navigation menu
tabs.
H. I (Information): Access features such as Where am I?, SIRIUS威
Travel Link™, Calendar, System Info and Help.
I. PHONE: Access the SYNC phone menu.
J. DISP: Select a display mode: On, Status Bar Only, and Off.
K. SEEK:
• In radio and satellite radio mode, press the arrow buttons to find
previous or next available stations or channels within the currently
selected Category or Genre.
• In CD/DVD mode, press the arrow buttons to select the previous or
next track or chapter.
L. MENU:
• Press to access the system menu.
• Press while the system menu is active to see the menu tabs of
Display, Clock, Feedback Settings, System Settings and Valet Mode.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 415
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
M. SOUND:
• Access the sound menu.
• Press while the sound menu is active to see the menu tabs of
Bass/Treble, Balance/Fade, SCV (Speed Compensated Volume), DSP
(Digital Signal Processing) and Visualizer.
N. MEDIA:
• Press to access the media menu.
• Press while the media menu is active to see the available sources of
CD/DVD, Jukebox and User Device.
O. RADIO:
• Press to access the radio menu.
• Press while the radio menu is active to see the available sources of
AM, FM1, FM2, SAT1, SAT2, and SAT3 (satellite radio).
P. VOL/PUSH: Turn to adjust the volume. Press and hold to turn the
system on and off.
Note: If a navigation route is active when the navigation system is
turned off, the route is resumed when the system is turned on again.
DISPLAY MODE
You can choose to turn your screen on or off and also if you would like
to view the status bars on the top and bottom of the screen. Press DISP
to see the options.
Display Mode Voice Commands
The following voice commands are available in display mode. If
you are not in display mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel. When prompted, say “Display mode” and then
any of the following commands.
Display mode voice commands
“Display on”
“Display off”
“Status bar”
“Brighter”
“Dimmer”
“Day”
“Night”
“Auto”
“Help”
416 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
STATUS BARS
The top status bar shows the
current mode, exterior temperature,
time and display icons if you have
enabled Bluetooth or other options.
The bottom status bar shows the
Home icon and may also show the
Artist and Title of the currently
playing CD, Artist and Title for
Jukebox and radio.
Customizing Your Home Screen
Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software, your screens
may vary in appearance from the screens shown in this section. Your
features may also be limited depending on your market. Check with your
authorized dealer for availability.
Press the house icon to access the home screen. Here you can:
• Save or view pictures.
• View your current audio settings.
• Display the audio visualizer.
You can split the screen in to two or three different sections, or you can
choose to have one main view.
• The left side displays an uploaded photo or the map screen.
• The right side can also display the uploaded photo. The upper right
panel only displays the current audio settings. The lower right panel
displays the vehicle’s visualizer.
Loading Photos
Note: The system is not compatible with discs written in Packet Write
mode.
Note: Only the photograph(s) which meets these conditions are displayed.
Your system allows you to save and view up to 32 photos. The photo
display has the following limitations:
• The file must be 1.5MB or smaller.
• The file extension must be JPE, JPG or JPEG.
• The file path must be 255 characters or fewer.
• Up to 256 files or folders can be displayed in one folder.
•
The CD or DVD must be ISO 9660 format, UDF format is not supported.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 417
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
To load photos:
1. Touch the left side of the home screen.
2. Select Add. When the disclaimer appears asking to confirm the
supported photo formats, press OK.
3. Insert a CD-ROM which contains your photos.
4. Press OK. The photos are listed on the right half of the screen.
5. Select either Add or Add All. The photos are now saved to the hard
drive.
Editing and Deleting Photos
To edit photos, go to the home screen, then:
1. Touch the current photo on the home screen.
2. Select the Edit button.
3. Adjust the photo by zooming in or out, moving right, left, up or down
and also rotating left or right.
Note: Press the Reset button to return to the original image.
To delete a photo, select the Delete button.
To delete all photos:
1. Press the Menu hard button.
2. Select the System Settings tab on the touchscreen.
3. Press the View button for Delete Stored Items.
4. Select Saved photos.
Using the Touch-sensitive Controls on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the graphic with your finger. To
get the best performance from the touch-sensitive controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls. They are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may cause a nearby control to turn
on or off.
• Make sure your hands are clean and dry.
• Since the touchscreen operates based on the touch of a finger, you
may have trouble using it if you are wearing gloves.
• Metal and other conductive material should be kept away from the
surface of the touchscreen as this may cause electronic interference
(i.e., control activation).
418 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Clean the display with a clean, soft cloth, such as one used for cleaning
glasses. If dirt or finger prints are still visible, apply a small amount of
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the display. Do
not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean the display.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in
front of you. The system provides feedback through audible tones,
prompts, questions and spoken confirmations depending on the situation
and the chosen level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions (confirmation prompts) when it is
not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses
to your request.
When using voice commands, words and icons may also appear in the
lower left status bar indicating the status of the voice session (i.e.,
listening, success, failed, paused or try again).
How To Use Voice Commands with Your System
Press the voice icon; after the tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time
“Audio” “Radio”
“CD” “SYNC”
*
“Disc” “Tutorial”
“Display mode” “User profile”
“DVD” “Video CD”
“Jukebox” “Voice settings”
“Line in” “Help”
“Navigation”
*
If equipped.
To access a list of all available voice commands, press the I hard button.
Select the Help tab on the touchscreen, then the Voice Commands tab
and choose the desired category.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 419
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of the vehicle is as quiet as possible. Wind
noise from open windows and road vibrations may prevent the system
from correctly recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until after the tone sounds and
Listening appears before saying a command. Any command spoken
prior to this does not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses between words.
• At any time you can interrupt the system while it is speaking by
pressing the voice icon.
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the level of system interaction,
help and feedback. The system defaults to standard interaction which
uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides more detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
Confirmation Prompts: Confirmation prompts are short questions the
system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are
multiple possible responses to your request. If turned off, the system
simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and you may still
occasionally be asked to confirm settings.
420 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SYSTEM MENU FEATURES
Your system offers many menu features, such as allowing you to adjust
the touchscreen brightness, time and language, feedback and system
settings. You can access these options by pressing the MENU hard
button.
If you select: You can:
Display Brightness allows you to adjust screen
brightness by touching + or -.
Contrast allows you to adjust screen contrast
by touching + or -.
Day/Night Mode allows you to select Day
mode, Night mode or have the system
automatically switch for you by selecting Auto
mode.
Daytime Color allows you to select a light or
dark color for daytime screen lighting.
Note: When the headlamps are on under very
bright outdoor light conditions, the system
remains in day mode, even if night is selected.
Clock Display Clock allows you to turn the clock
on or off.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with an
in-dash analog clock, you can set the time on
this screen, but it may not appear in the
status bar for viewing purposes.
Format allows you to switch between 12–
and 24–hour clock display.
Auto Time Zone allows you to have the
system automatically switch the time
whenever you enter a new time zone.
Note: The system does not implement
daylight savings time.
Restore Defaults allows you to restore
system defaults.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 421
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
Feedback Touch Screen Button Beep allows you to
select when the system sounds an audible
tone: All Buttons (whenever any system
button is touched), Touch Screen (only when
touchscreen selections are made) or Off (no
audible tones at all).
Voice Volume allows you to change
navigation voice and audible tone volume by
touching + or -.
Satellite Radio Channel Name allows you
to choose to display the satellite radio
channel name.
Voice Recognition Interaction Mode
allows you to choose the level of system
interaction and feedback. Standard is the
default and provides the most interaction and
feedback using prompts. Advanced uses less
feedback and prompts.
Voice Recognition Confirmation allows you
to choose level of voice command
confirmation. Selecting On causes the system
to always ask to confirm a command.
Selecting Off causes the system to ask for
confirmation less frequently.
Voice Recognition User Profile allows you
to switch between user profiles.
Train the system to better recognize your
voice. Two profiles can be created; see Using
voice recognition earlier in this section.
422 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you select: You can:
System Settings Language allows you to choose between
English, Spanish and French.
Units allows you to choose between English
and Metric measurements.
Keyboard Layout allows you to choose
between an ABC or QWERTY keyboard.
Delete Stored Items allows you to choose
to delete all of the entries from Address Book,
Previous Destinations, Avoid Areas, Saved
Photos and Voice Recognition Profiles. Touch
View to see what entries have been stored.
Restore Factory Default Settings allows
you to restore factory default settings.
Valet Mode Lock and unlock the system using a four-digit
PIN.
Note: The PIN can be reset by
simultaneously pressing and holding presets 1
and 5 while on the PIN entry screen. After
approximately five seconds, the system
transitions to the valet mode screen indicating
that the PIN is reset. Once you have reset the
PIN, the system then allows you to set a new
PIN.
Voice Control Set the system to automatically listen for USB
or SYNC voice commands first. This
eliminates the need to say “USB” or “User
Device” before any SYNC media commands.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 423
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
ENTERTAINMENT
Your system offers many media options. You can access these options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
AM/FM Radio
Press the RADIO hard button.
To change between AM and FM1/FM2, touch the AM or FM tab.
When you select: You can:
Show Options Scan allows you to hear a brief sampling of
all radio stations.
Scan Presets allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all stations stored in the memory
presets.
Autoset Presets allows you to store the
strongest local stations available in the AM
and FM frequency bands.
HD Radio allows you to receive radio
broadcasts digitally (where available),
providing free, crystal clear sound. See the
HD Radio™ information in the following
section.
*
Multicast allows you to choose which HD
radio broadcast you would like to receive.
When HD Radio broadcasts are available, this
button appears if the selected station has
more than one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies
the main programming status and is available
in analog and digital broadcasts. Any
additional multicast stations (HD2 through
HD8) are digitally broadcast and can be
accessed by pressing Multicast. See the HD
Radio™ information in the following
section.
**
424 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Show Presets View the preset stations. To save a station,
press and hold one of the memory preset
hard buttons or memory preset areas on the
touchscreen. There is a brief mute while the
station is being saved, then sound returns
when it is done.
Set PTY/All Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
**
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
*
U.S only.
**
U.S only, FM1/FM2 radio tab only.
Audio and Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the audio system, press the voice button
on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the audio system, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Audio”, then any of the commands in the following
chart.
“AUDIO”
“CD” “Line in” “Sirius”
“Disc” “Off ” “SYNC”
“DVD” “On” “USB”
“Headphones” “Phone” “User Device”
“Headphones off” “Radio” “Video CD”
“Jukebox” “Read Message” “Help”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 425
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<530–1710>” “FM2” “Store preset <1–6>”
“<87.7–107.9>” “FM2 preset <1–6>” “Store AM preset
<1–6>”
“AM” “Off ” “Store FM 1 preset
<1–6>”
“AM <530–1710>” “On” “Store FM 2 preset
<1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>” “Preset <1–6>” “Store autoset presets”
“FM <87.7–107.9>” “Seek down” “Tune”
**
“FM1” “Seek up” “Help”
“FM1 preset <1–6>” “Store”
*
*
If you have said, “Store”, see the following “Store” chart.
**
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<530–1710>” “AM preset <1–6>” “FM2”
“<87.7–107.9>” “FM <87.7–107.9>” “FM2 preset <1–6>”
“AM” “FM1” “Preset <1–6>”
“AM <530–1710>” “FM1 preset <1–6>” “Help”
“STORE”
“Preset <1–6>”
“AM preset <1–6>”
“FM 1 preset <#>”
“FM 2 preset <#>”
“Autoset presets”
426 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver which allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog broadcasts it already receives.
Digital broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts
with free, crystal clear audio and no static or distortion. For more
information, and a guide to available stations and programming, please
visit www.hdradio.com.
When this feature is enabled and you are tuned to a station broadcasting
HD Radio technology, you may notice the following indicators on your
screen:
HD) logo blinks when a digital station is being acquired and is
solid when digital audio is playing. When this logo is available,
you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen.
Multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The numbers that are highlighted signify available digital channels where
new or different content is available. HD1 signifies the main programming
status and is available in analog and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only broadcast digitally.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following
functions:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all available stations.
This feature still works when HD Radio
reception is activated, although it does not
scan for HD2 through HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station has a
digital broadcast.
Seek Hear the next strong radio station.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Seek repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
multicast channel, press Seek to advance to
the next strong station.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 427
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Tune Go up and down the frequency in individual
increments.
If the current station has multiple digital
broadcasts, the multicast indicator appears.
Press Tune repeatedly to advance through all
available broadcasts. If you are on the last
broadcast channel, press to advance to the
next frequency on the band.
Set PTY/All Select a category of music you would like to
search for and then choose to either seek or
scan for the stations.
Note: The system scans the frequency band
three times for the chosen program type. If
the program type is unavailable in your
reception range, the system returns to the
previous station.
Multicast Allows you to choose which HD radio
broadcast you would like to receive. When HD
Radio broadcasts are available, this button
appears if the selected station has more than
one digital broadcast. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in analog
and digital broadcasts. Any additional
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
digitally broadcast and can be accessed by
pressing Multicast.
To save a multicast
station as a preset
When the channel is active on-screen, press
and hold a memory preset slot on the right of
the screen until the sound returns. There is a
brief mute, then the sound returns signifying
it was saved. When recalling an HD2 or HD3
memory preset, there is a mute before the
digital audio is played as the system must
once again acquire the digital signal.
As with any saved radio station, you cannot
access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.
428 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues
Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and
you are on the fringe of the reception area,
the station may mute due to weak signal
strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system
switches back to the analog broadcast until
the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the
possible HD2 through HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted
unless it is able to connect to the digital
signal again.
Station blending When a station is first received (aside from
HD2 through HD7 multicast stations), the
system first plays the station in the analog
version and then, if the receiver verifies the
station is an HD Radio station, it shifts to the
digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to
digital. This shift from analog to digital sound
or digital back to analog, is known as
blending.
In order to provide the best possible experience, a contact form has been
developed to report any station issues found while listening to a station
broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Every station is independently
owned and operated. These stations are responsible for ensuring all
audio streams and data fields are accurate. See the following chart for
potential station issues.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 429
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Potential Station Issues
Issue Cause Action
Echo, stutter, skip or
repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease
in audio volume.
Poor time alignment
by the radio
broadcaster.
None. This is a
broadcast issue.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.
The radio is shifting
between analog and
digital audio.
None. This is a
reception issue that
may clear up as you
continue to drive.
Audio mute delay
when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset
or direct tune.
The digital multicast is
not available until the
HD Radio broadcast is
decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is
available.
None. This is normal
behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a
preset or from a direct
tune.
The previously stored
multicast preset or
direct tune is not
available in your
current reception area.
None. The station is
not available in your
current location.
Text information does
not match currently
playing audio.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
No text information
shown for currently
selected frequency.
Data service issue by
the radio broadcaster.
Fill out the station
issue form at website
listed below.
*
HD2 through HD7
stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2 through HD7
channel search.
None. This is normal
behavior.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
HD Radio™ Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital
Corp. U.S. and foreign patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD Radio
logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not responsible for the content
sent using HD Radio technology. Content may be changed, added or
deleted at any time at the station owner’s discretion.
430 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
HD Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to the radio, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to the radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Radio”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“RADIO”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune”
*
“Help”
*
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“TUNE”
“<87.7 - 107.9> HD <1–8>”
“FM <87.7-107.9> HD <1-8>”
“Tune HD <1-8>”
“Help”
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Press the RADIO hard button, then select SAT on the
touchscreen.
When you select: You can:
SAT123 Access three different satellite radio modes
(SAT1, SAT2 or SAT3).
Scan Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all
satellite radio channels within the current
genre.
Scan Presets Allows you to hear a brief sampling of all
channels stored in the memory presets.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 431
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Channel Guide See a list of channels sorted by genre and
also skip or lock out certain channels. Select
the desired genre and choose a channel by
pressing the channel name button. You can
then choose to Skip or Lock a certain
channel. A skipped channel is not accessible
using the tune knob, scan or seek functions.
(To access the skipped channel, select Direct
Tune and enter the channel number.) A
locked channel can only be accessed by
entering the Channel Guide and then entering
the system’s PIN.
Direct Tune Enter the desired satellite channel number
using the on-screen keypad.
Set Genre Allows you to choose from a list of genres.
Once a genre is chosen and you press SEEK,
it only looks for channels in that genre.
432 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Memo Allows you to save a song title and artist to
the system. When the saved song is playing
on any satellite radio channel, the system
alerts you with a pop-up in the lower status
bar. You can either tune to the station or
ignore the pop-up. When you are in the Memo
screen, the following options are available:
Refresh allows you to refresh the current
artist and title information.
Song Alert allows you to store the song
information displayed in the Title Field. When
the stored song is played in the future, an
audio and visual notification is initiated.
Artist Alert allows you to store the artist
information currently displayed in the Artist
Field. When that artist is played again, the
system alerts you with a pop-up.
Alert On/Off allows you to select Artists and
Titles that you would like the system to alert
you to when they are playing on other
channels.
Note: SIRIUS威 does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor Company
shall not be responsible for Alert feature
variation.
Show Presets Display presets at the bottom of the screen.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 433
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 Satellite Radio Voice Commands
If you are listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any
of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite radio, press the voice button
and, after the tone, say “Sirius”, then any of the commands in the
following chart.
“SIRIUS”
“<0–233>” “Seek up”
“<Channel name>” “Sirius off”
“Preset <#>” “Sirius On”
“SAT 1” “Store”
*
“SAT 1 preset <#>” “Store preset <1–6>”
“SAT 2” “Store SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“SAT 2 preset <#>” “Store SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“SAT 3” “Store SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“SAT 3 preset <#>” “Tune”
**
“Seek down ” “Help”
*
If you have said, “Store”, see the following “Store” chart.
**
If you have said, “Tune”, see the following “Tune” chart.
“STORE”
“Preset <1–6>”
“SAT1 preset <1–6>”
“SAT2 preset <1–6>”
“SAT3 preset <1–6>”
“TUNE”
“<0–233>” “SAT 2”
“<Channel name>” “SAT 2 preset <#>”
“Preset <#>” “SAT 3”
“SAT 1” “SAT 3 preset <#>”
“SAT 1 preset <#>” “Help”
434 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS姞 Information
Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change, rearrange, add or
delete programming including canceling, moving or adding particular
channels, and its prices, at any time, with or without notice to you. Ford
Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes.
SIRIUS satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio
service that broadcasts a variety of
music, sports, news, weather, traffic
and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed SIRIUS
satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term which begins on the date of
sale or lease of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite
radio channels, and other features, please visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call SIRIUS at 1–888–539–7474.
Satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN): You need your ESN
to activate, modify or track your satellite radio account. The ESN is
found on the System Information Screen (SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX).
To access your ESN, press the I button on the navigation screen, then
select the System Info tab.
Potential satellite radio reception issues
Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
Terrain Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels,
freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with
your reception.
Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast
repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake
a weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal
interference
Your display may show ACQUIRING ...to
indicate the interference and the audio system
may mute.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 435
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SIRIUS troubleshooting tips
Radio Display Condition Possible Action
Acquiring Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
None. This message
should disappear shortly.
Sat Fault/SIRIUS
system failure
Internal module or
system failure present.
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a
fault. See your
authorized dealer for
service.
Invalid Channel Channel no longer
available.
Tune to another channel
or choose another
preset.
Unsubscribed
Channel
Subscription not
available for this channel.
Contact SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
subscribe to the channel,
or tune to another
channel.
No Signal Loss of signal from the
SIRIUS satellite or
SIRIUS tower to the
vehicle antenna.
The signal is currently
being blocked. When you
move into an open area,
the signal should return.
Updating Update of channel
programming in progress.
None. The process may
take up to three minutes.
Call SIRIUS
1–888–539–7474
Satellite service has been
deactivated by SIRIUS
Satellite Radio.
Call SIRIUS at
1–888–539–7474 to
reactivate or resolve
subscription issues.
No Channels
Available
All the channels in the
selected category are
locked or skipped.
Unlock or unskip the
channels using the
channel guide.
Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the
channels available for
your vehicle.
None.
436 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
CD
Press the MEDIA hard button, then select the CD tab on the
touchscreen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC appears
in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Track List and Record.
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Track List View a list of the tracks.
Record Save the CD or CD tracks into the Jukebox to
hear them played later.
CD Voice Commands
If you are listening to a CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“CD”
“Folder mode” “Play next folder” “Repeat folder”
“Folder mode off” “Play next track” “Repeat off”
“Pause” “Play previous folder” “Repeat track”
“Play” “Play previous track” “Shuffle”
“Play folder <1–255>” “Play track <1–512>” “Shuffle off”
“Play folder <1–255>
track <1–512>”
“Repeat” “Help”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 437
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
MP3
Press the MEDIA hard button, then select the CD tab on the
touchscreen. If there is no disc in the system, NO DISC appears
in the status bar and you cannot access the CD screen.
Once a disc is loaded, you can choose from Scan, Compress, Repeat,
Shuffle, Folder Mode and Folder List.
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Compress Turn the compression feature on and off. This
feature boosts more quiet music and lowers
louder music to minimize the need for volume
adjustment.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Folder Mode Listen to and seek through songs within the
current folder.
Folder List Access and view folders on the disc. Select
the root folder (if available), then any other
folder on the disc.
DVD
Note: Your system only plays NTSC formatted discs. PAL format is not
supported.
Your system allows you to play DVD audio and video discs. Make sure
the vehicle is in position P (vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission) or the parking brake is engaged (vehicles equipped with a
manual transmission). This allows you to be able to view and hear the
DVD. If the vehicle is moving, the video does not play.
When you select: You can:
Title Go to the disc’s main title screen.
Menu Go to the disc’s main menu.
Cursor Controls Navigate to the desired menu selections.
438 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Settings Video Display Settings allows you to adjust
the brightness and contrast. You can also
choose to return to the default settings by
pressing Restore Default.
Audio Language allows you to choose which
language you would like the DVD audio track
to play in.
Subtitle Display allows you to turn subtitles
on and off.
Subtitle Language allows you to choose
which language you would like the subtitles to
appear in.
Aspect Ratio allows you to choose wide, full,
normal or cinema display.
Angle Mark Notification allows you to have
more viewing angles from which to select.
Once you have made your selection, press
ENTER to confirm.
Search Go to a specific title or chapter using the
keypad.
Note: Some of the above settings are disc-dependent and availability and
operation may vary.
During disc play, you can also touch
the screen to access the virtual
remote which allows you to Move
Controls on the screen as well as
use the cursor controls, Enter and
Return to navigate and make
selections within the menus.
Dolby威 noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby威
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby威 and the double-D symbol are
registered trademarks of Dolby威 Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 439
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Disc Voice Commands
If you are listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button
on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to or watching a disc, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say “Disc”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“Disc”
“Folder mode” “Play next chapter” “Play previous track”
“Folder mode off” “Play next folder” “Play title <1–99>”
“Menu” “Play next group” “Play track <1–512>”
“Pause” “Play next title” “Repeat”
“Play” “Play next track” “Repeat off”
“Play chapter
<1–999>”
“Play previous
chapter”
“Shuffle”
“Play folder <1–255>” “Play previous folder” “Shuffle off”
“Play folder <1–255>
track <1–512>”
“Play previous group” “Title menu”
“Play group <1–9>” “Play previous title” “Help”
DVD Voice Commands
If you are watching a DVD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a DVD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “DVD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
“DVD”
“Menu” “Play next title”
“Menu title” “Play next track <1–512>”
“Pause” “Play previous chapter”
“Play” “Play previous title”
“Play chapter <1–999>” “Play previous track”
“Play group <1–9>” “Play title <1–99>”
“Play next chapter” “Repeat”
“Play next group” “Repeat off”
440 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Video CD Voice Commands
If you are watching a video CD, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. When prompted, say any of the
commands in the following chart.
If you are not watching a video CD, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say “Video CD”, then any of the commands in the following chart.
Video CD voice commands
“Play”
“Pause”
“Play next track”
“Play previous track”
“Play track <1–512>”
“Help”
Jukebox
Your system has a Jukebox feature which allows you to save desired
tracks or CDs to the hard drive for later access. The hard drive can store
up to 10 GB* (164 hours; approximately 2472 tracks) of music. The
system contains a Gracenote威 media database that allows for display of
song title, album title, and album cover art. After saving music to the
hard drive, you can access and play your music by specific tracks, artists,
albums or genres. You can even choose to create and access your own
playlists.
*Note: 1 GB equals one billion bytes (1000000000B).
Recording Music to Your Jukebox
To record music to your jukebox:
1. Insert a CD, then select Record on the touchscreen.
2. Select individual tracks or press Select All to record the entire CD.
Note: The system automatically saves all tracks if none are selected.
3. Press Start Recording.
The progress shows at the bottom of the screen.
Note: If you are not actively listening to the disc being recorded, the
record rate is much quicker (as fast as five minutes).
Navigation System (If Equipped) 441
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Accessing the Music in Your Jukebox
Once you have saved music to your jukebox, you can then choose
different ways to play the music.
1. Press the MEDIA hard button on the navigation system.
2. Select the Jukebox tab on the touchscreen. You can then select from
the following options:
When you select: You can:
Scan Hear a brief sampling of all listenable tracks.
Repeat Hear the selected track continuously.
Shuffle Play the tracks in a random order.
Music library Access all of your saved music. You can choose to
view or play the material in the following ways:
Play All Tracks allows you to play all tracks saved
in the jukebox.
Playlist allows you to play your own playlist.
Play genre allows you to have the system play
only music from a specific genre.
Play artist allows you to have the system play
only music by a specific artist.
Play album allows you to have the system play
only music from a specific album.
Options Edit Playlists allows you to edit your playlists.
Edit Music Library Contents allows you to make
changes to the content in your music library.
Update Album Information from CD Database
allows you to update the residing album
information from the Gracenote威 database if a
recent software update was performed.
Hard Disk Drive Information allows you to
access the system’s hard drive disc information,
such as used space, free space and total capacity.
CD Database Information allows you to access
the CD database information.
442 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Creating a Playlist
Press the MEDIA hard button, then select the Jukebox tab on the
touchscreen.
1. Select Options.
2. Select Edit Playlists, then which playlist you would like to create.
3.
Select which category you would like to access from your saved music.
4. Select the desired songs and then press Add. The system shows you
the currently selected songs. You can choose to Edit Name to change
the name of the playlist, Delete Playlist to remove it, Add Tracks to the
playlist or Sort Playlist.
5. When you are done making any adjustments to the playlist, select Edit
Name to rename your playlist.
Jukebox Voice Commands
If you are listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the
voice button on the steering wheel control. When prompted, say
any of the commands in the following chart.
If you are not listening to music stored in the jukebox, press the voice
button and, after the tone, say “Jukebox”, then any of the commands in
the following chart.
“JUKEBOX”
“Pause” “Play playlist <name>” “Search album
<name>”
3
“Play”
1
“Play previous track” “Search artist
<name>”
3
“Play album <name>”
1
“Play track <name>”
1
“Search genre
<name>”
3
“Play artist <name>”
1
“Refine album
<name>”
2
“Search track
<name>”
3
“Play genre <name>” “Refine artist
<name>”
2
“Shuffle”
“Play next track” “Repeat” “Shuffle off”
“Play playlist <1–5>” “Repeat off” “Help”
1
These commands can be said at any time during listening to the jukebox
and after any of the search and refine commands.
2
Your search can be narrowed beyond the search command by using
these commands.
3
While listening to the jukebox, press the voice button on the steering
wheel control. When prompted, you may say any of these commands.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 443
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
User Device
If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC威, there is a User Device tab. For
more information, see the SYNC威 chapter.
Line In (Auxiliary Input Jack)
Your vehicle is equipped with an audio input jack which allows a portable
audio device to be plugged into your vehicle’s audio system. To turn this
feature on, press the MEDIA hard button on the system.
For more information on the auxiliary input jack, see Auxiliary input
jack in the Audio Systems chapter.
INFORMATION
Under the Information menu, you can access features such as Where Am
I? and SIRIUS威 Travel Link™, view your calendar, see system
information and get basic system help.
Press the I (Information) hard button to access these features.
Where Am I?
Press the I button and select the Where Am I? tab. The system gives you
your current GPS location (latitude and longitude), the current street
you are on as well as the street in front and behind the vehicle position
along with distance information.
Note: Not all tab selections shown here are available in all markets.
Check with your authorized dealer for availability.
SIRIUS姞 Travel Link™ (If Equipped and If Activated)
WARNING: Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Ford strongly recommends that
drivers use extreme caution when using any device or feature that may
take their focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of the vehicle. We recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving, encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible and that you become aware of applicable state
and local laws that may affect use of electronic devices while driving.
Note: A paid subscription is required to access and use these features.
Go to www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more information.
SIRIUS Travel Link can help you locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, access the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and scores to current sports games.
444 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Press the I (information) button, then select Sirius Travel Link.
Choose from any of the following services:
When you select: You can:
Traffic On Route Identify traffic incidents on your route, nearby
your vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places (if programmed).
Traffic Nearby
My Places
Weather View the nearby weather, current weather, or
the 5–day forecast for the chosen area. Select
Weather Map to see storms, radar
information, charts and winds. Select Area to
select from a listing of weather locations. Also
view ski conditions for a specific area.
Fuel Prices View fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation
route.
Movie Listings View nearby movie theaters and their show
times (if available).
Sports Info. View scores and schedules from a variety of
sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite
teams for easier access. The score
automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.
SIRIUS Travel Link Voice Commands
Press the voice button and, after the tone, say “Travel Link”,
then any of the commands in the following chart:
“TRAVEL LINK”
“5–day weather forecast” “NBA schedule”
“Baseball schedule” “NBA scores”
“Baseball scores” “NFL schedule”
“College basketball schedule” “NFL scores”
“College basketball scores” “NHL schedule”
“College football schedule” “NHL scores”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 445
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“TRAVEL LINK”
“College football scores” “Sports schedule”
*
“Fuel prices” “Sports scores”
**
“Golf leaders” “Traffic”
“Golf schedule” “Travel link help”
“Motor sports order” “Weather”
“Motor sports schedule” “Weather map”
“Movie listings”
*
If you have said “Sports schedule”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Sports schedule” chart:
**
If you have said “Sports scores”, you may say any of the commands in
the “Sports scores” chart:
“SPORTS SCHEDULES”
“Baseball schedule” “NBA schedule”
“College basketball schedule” “NFL schedule”
“College football schedule” “NHL schedule”
“Golf schedule” “Travel link help”
“Motor sports schedule”
“SPORTS SCORES”
“Baseball scores” “NBA scores”
“College basketball scores” “NFL scores”
“College football scores” “NHL scores”
“Golf leaderboard” “Travel link help”
“Motor sports results”
Calendar
Press the I (information) button, then select Calendar. You can
then select which month you would like to view by using the
arrow buttons or selecting Go to Today.
You can view calendars from one previous year and the next 10 years.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
446 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
System Information
Press the I (information) button, then select System
Information.
In this screen you can view the following options:
• Phone number for your Customer Service Center
• Current system versions installed
• Current SIRIUS威 Radio ESN
• SIRIUS威 Travel Link™ ESN.
Note: Not all tab selections may be available in all markets. Check with
your authorized dealer for availability.
Help
The Help screen allows you to view basic information about controls and
driving restrictions as well as traffic legend information and basic voice
commands available in various modes.
If you select: You can:
Basic Operation View hard buttons on your navigation system.
Press the desired icon to view the button
description.
Driving Restriction View the system’s driving restriction.
Traffic Legend View the color code for the Speed and Flow
of roads on the navigation system. You can
also select Traffic Incidents to help you
differentiate between viewed and unviewed
incidents.
Voice Commands View a brief listing of possible voice
commands in a specific mode.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 447
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SOUND
The sound menu allows you to access and adjust settings, such as Bass,
Treble, Fade, Balance, Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) and the
visualizer. Press the SOUND hard button.
When you select: You can:
Bass/Treble Increase or decrease levels by pressing + or -.
Balance/Fade Adjust the sound between the left and right
speakers (Balance) and front and rear
speakers (Fade).
SCV Have the system automatically adjust radio
volume according to vehicle speed to
compensate for road and wind noise. Select a
level of compensation between 1 and 7 by
pressing the corresponding button.
Visualizer Turn the audio visualizer display on or off.
Note: Turning the visualizer setting to off
does not remove the visualizer on the home
screen. You need to select a different view in
order to remove the visualizer.
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Your navigation system allows you to set a destination by using your
touchscreen or voice commands.
The navigation system contains map coverage for the United States,
Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands, Canada and Mexico.
Disclaimer
A disclaimer appears once per ignition cycle when the DEST button is
pressed. Press Accept to agree to the terms and access navigation
functions. If you do not press Accept, you only have access to
non-navigation functions. The disclaimer has information similar to the
following:
• Always obey local traffic regulations.
• It is recommended to program the system only when stopped.
• Some functions are unavailable while the vehicle is in motion to help
minimize distraction.
• Periodic map updates are available at an additional cost.
448 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Programming a Destination Using the Touchscreen
1. Press the DEST hard button.
2. Select from the following:
• Quick: Allows you to cancel the route, access emergency destinations
(such as a hospital or police), save your favorite destinations to
presets for quick access, find the nearest point of interest (POI), and
also to use a previous destination or an entry from your address book
as a destination.
• Standard: Allows you to set a destination using any of the following:
Address Book, Previous Destination, Phone Number, Map, Street
Address, POI, Freeway Exit/Entrance or Intersection. Selections on
the standard screen are speed-dependent features.
• Edit Route: Allows you to make any adjustments to the currently
selected navigation route such as: Cancel, Detour, View Route, Edit
Route Preferences, Edit Traffic Preferences, Edit Destination/Way
Points and Edit Turn List.
Programming a Destination Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button on the steering wheel.
If you want to: Say:
Enter an address. “Destination street address”
Enter an intersection. “Destination intersection”
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its category.
“Destination nearest <POI category>” or
“Destination nearest POI”
Find a point of interest
(POI) by its name.
“Destination POI”
Go to a previous
destination.
“Destination previous destination”
Go to your home
location.
“Destination home”
Use a nametag from
your address book.
“Destination <nametag>”
Get help. “Help”
Note: If the system’s language is set to French or Spanish, the city and
street names need to be spelled. When in Spelling Mode, you may speak
letters or say, “Line #”. The system is designed to work even if you have
made a spelling error.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 449
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
POI Categories
Your system offers a variety if POI (Points of Interest) categories.
Main Categories
Food/Drink & Dining Automotive
Travel & Transportation Shopping
Financial Entertainment & Arts
Emergency Recreation & Sports
Community Government
Health & Medicine Domestic Services
Within these main categories, there are subcategories which contain
more listings:
Subcategories
All Restaurants
Auto Dealership
Parking
Public Transit
Home & Garden
Education
Personal Care Services
To expand these listings, press the + in front of the POI listing.
The system also allows you to sort the POIs alphabetically, by distance or
by cityseekr listings (if available).
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into account when planning your
route. Press the NAV hard button.
When you select: You can:
Map Preferences Access and adjust map content, such as
Street Name, Time to Destination, Speed
Limit, Breadcrumbs, Points of Interest (POI)
icons, Map View, Bird’s Eye View and Turn
List Format.
Route Preferences Choose between Shortest Distance or Fastest
Time when navigating a route. Also select to
avoid freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc.
450 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Traffic Preferences Have the system color code roads according
to speed of traffic flow or add special icons to
the map for things such as road work,
accidents, etc.
You can also choose to receive traffic alerts.
*
Navigation
Preferences
Access and adjust guidance prompts, average
speed, fuel price display, calibration and
default settings.
Avoid Areas Choose areas which you want the system to
avoid when calculating a route for you.
The system does its best to avoid the items
and areas that have been set. There may be
some situations where it is impossible to
completely avoid the selection(s). For
example, if a destination or waypoint is
located in an area that is set to avoid, the
system cannot avoid it.
*
Requires SIRIUS威 Travel Link™, which is only available in the U.S.
Map Mode
Press the MAP hard button to view map mode. When in map mode, an
icon appears on the upper left side of the screen; this is a toggle button
to change the view of the map display.
Roads on the map are displayed in a variety of colors. Building footprints
display areas of major buildings in the 20 largest cities in the U.S. These
areas may be displayed depending on their size and the map zoom level.
Heading up always shows the direction of forward travel to be
upward on the screen. This view is available for map scales up to
2.5 mi (4 km). For larger map scales, this setting is remembered,
but the map is shown in North up only. If the scale returns below this
level, then Heading up is restored.
North up always shows the northern direction to be upward on
the screen.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 451
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Map Icons
Vehicle mark shows the current location of the vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display, except when in scroll mode.
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll the map; the icon is fixed in
the center of the screen. The map position closest to the cursor
is in a window on the top center part of the screen.
Address book entry default icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry. This is the default symbol
shown after the entry has been stored to the Address Book by any
method other than the map. A different icon can be selected from the 22
icons available; each icon can be used more than once.
Home indicates the location on the map currently stored as the
home position. Only one entry from the Address Book can be
saved as Home. This icon cannot be changed.
POI (Point Of Interest) icons can be displayed on the map
and can be turned on or off. There are about 56 subcategories of
POIs that can be selected to be displayed on the map one at a
time.
Starting point indicates the starting point of a planned route.
Waypoints indicates the location of a waypoint on the map.
The number inside the circle is different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in the route list.
Destination symbol indicates the ending point of a planned
route.
Next maneuver point indicates the location of the next turn
on the planned route.
S
2
452 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
No GPS symbol indicates that insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map positioning. This icon may be
intermittently displayed under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on the map display to access the
following options:
When you select: You can:
Set as Dest Select a scrolled location on the map as your
destination. (You may scroll the map by
pressing your index finger on the map display.
When you reach the desired location, simply
let go and then press Set as Dest.)
Set as Waypoint Set the current location as a waypoint.
Save to Address
Book
Save the current location to the address book.
POI Icons On/Off Select POI icons to be displayed on the map.
Up to three icons can be selected for display
on the map at the same time.
View Traffic Adjust the map display to the right scale. This
scale allows the entire route to be visible in
the screen.
View/Edit Route Access these features when a route is active:
Cancel route.
Edit route preferences.
Edit destination/waypoints.
View route.
Edit traffic preferences.
*
Edit turn list.
Navigation System (If Equipped) 453
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
When you select: You can:
Map Scrolling Single scroll mode allows you to press and
release on the map display to bring the
pressed position to the center of the screen.
The scroll mode times out after five minutes
of inactivity.
Continuous scroll mode allows you to press
and hold to begin scrolling continuously in
one of eight directions closest to the point
that is pressed. The scroll continues until the
map is released, and increases in speed after
three seconds. This is not possible if the
vehicle is moving. The scroll mode times out
after five minutes of inactivity.
*
Requires SIRIUS Travel Link™ to be activated.
Navteq is the digital map provider for the navigation application. If you
find map data errors, you may report them directly to Navteq by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Navteq evaluates all reported map errors
and responds with the result of their investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in Mexico, call
01–800–557–5539) or going to www.navigation.com/ford. You need to
specify the make and model of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
Navigation Voice Commands
When in navigation mode, press the voice button on the
steering wheel control. After the tone, say “Navigation”, then
any of the following commands:
“NAVIGATION”
“Cancel next waypoint” “Show destination”
“Cancel route” “Show heading up”
“Destination”
*
“Show map”
“Destination <nametag>” “Show next waypoint”
454 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
“NAVIGATION”
“Destination <POI category>” “Show north up”
“Destination home” “Show route”
“Destination intersection” “Show turn list”
“Destination nearest
<POI category>”
“Voice off”
“Destination nearest POI” “Voice on”
“Destination POI” “Voice volume decrease”
“Destination previous
destination”
“Voice volume increase”
“Destination street address” “Zoom in”
“Detour” “Zoom out”
“Play nametags” “Help”
“Repeat instruction”
*
If you have said the command, “Destination”, you may say any of the
above commands or commands in the following Destination chart.
“DESTINATION”
“<nametag>”
“<POI category>”
“Home”
“Intersection”
“Nearest <POI category>”
“Nearest POI”
“POI”
“POI category”
“Previous destination”
“Street address”
“Help”
Navigation System (If Equipped) 455
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Troubleshooting
Symptoms Possible Cause Action
Focus error. System unable to play
reproduced disc.
Contact your dealer.
Bad disc. Disc was inserted
upside down or the
system is unable to
read the information
on the disc.
The system
automatically ejects
the disc.
Track error. The system is unable
to reproduce a corrupt
MP3 file.
The system skips the
corrupted track.
Invalid disc detected. Dirty disc or
unsupported format.
Wipe the disc with a
dry, soft cloth from
the center to the outer
edge of the disc.
Address not found or
Address range does
not exist. Show the
midpoint of the street?
(Pop-up window)
The house number
entered is not
registered in the
database.
Press NO and enter a
valid number for the
specified street, or
press YES to view the
middle point of the
street.
Navigation fault. A
system fault has been
detected that may
cause the navigation
to perform abnormally.
Please contact your
dealership. (Pop-up
window)
System hardware or
software error.
Contact your dealer.
Error. PINs did not
match. Please re-enter.
(Pop-up window)
A different PIN was
entered to unlock the
system for valet mode.
Press OK and try
entering PIN again. If
unable, contact your
dealer.
Invalid PIN. Please
Re-enter. (Pop-up
window)
System does not
recognize PIN as valid.
Press OK and enter
different PIN to lock
the system.
456 Navigation System (If Equipped)
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
GENERAL INFORMATION
SYNC姞 End User License Agreement (EULA)
• You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software
licensed by FORD MOTOR COMPANY from an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as
well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic
documentation (“MS SOFTWARE”) are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is licensed,
not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with and/or communicate with, or
may be later upgraded to interface with and/or communicate with
additional software and/or systems provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY. The additional software and systems of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and
“online” or electronic documentation (“FORD SOFTWARE”) are
protected by international intellectual property laws and treaties. The
FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later upgraded to interface with
and/or communicate with additional software and/or systems provided by
third party software and service suppliers. The additional software and
services of third party origin, as well as associated media, printed
materials, and “online” or electronic documentation (“THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively and individually will be referred to as
⬙SOFTWARE.⬙
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA grants you the
following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems and/or services provide by or
through FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Appendices 457
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
DESCRIPTION OF OTHER RIGHTS AND LIMITATIONS:
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that recognition errors are inherent
in the process. Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its suppliers
shall be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech
recognition process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation and
Disassembly: You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that such
activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this
limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on the SOFTWARE, except and
only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted by
applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software). Even if you receive multiple
EULAs, you are licensed to use only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights
under this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer of the DEVICE,
provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any
upgrades, and, if applicable, the Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and
the recipient agrees to the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is
an upgrade, any transfer must include all prior versions of the
SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any other rights, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or MS may terminate this EULA if you fail to comply with
the terms and conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights Management: Content owners use
the WMDRM technology included in your DEVICE to protect their
intellectual property, included copyrighted content. Portions of the
SOFTWARE on your DEVICE use WMDRM software to access
WMDRM-protected content. If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask Microsoft to revoke the
458 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
SOFTWARE’s ability to use WMDRM to play or copy protected
content. This action does not affect unprotected content. When your
DEVICE downloads licenses for protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list with the licenses. Content
owners may require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE on your DEVICE
to access their content. If you decline an upgrade, you will not be able
to access content that requires the upgrade.
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree that MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and systems suppliers,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent may collect and use
technical information gathered in any manner as part of product
support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to improve their products or to
provide customized services or technologies to you. MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You acknowledge and agree that MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may
automatically check the version of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and may provide upgrades or
supplements to the SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The SOFTWARE may permit FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party software and service suppliers, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent to
provide or make available to you SOFTWARE updates, supplements,
add-on components, or Internet-based services components of the
SOFTWARE after the date you obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE (“Supplemental Components”).
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to you Supplemental Components
and no other EULA terms are provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA shall apply.
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent
make available Supplemental Components, and no other EULA terms are
Appendices 459
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
provided, then the terms of this EULA shall apply, except that the MS,
Microsoft Corporation or affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent reserve the right to discontinue without
liability any Internet-based services provided to you or made available to
you through the use of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS SOFTWARE may provide you
with the ability to link to third party sites through the use of the
SOFTWARE. The third party sites are not under the control of MS,
Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
Neither MS nor Microsoft Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for (i) the contents of any third
party sites, any links contained in third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third party sites. If the SOFTWARE
provides links to third party sites, those links are provided to you only
as a convenience, and the inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You recognize your obligation to
drive responsibly and keep attention on the road. You will read and
abide with the DEVICE operating instructions particularly as they
pertain to safety and assumes any risk associated with the use of the
DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the SOFTWARE is provided
by FORD MOTOR COMPANY separate from the DEVICE on media such
as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or other means,
and is labeled “For Upgrade Purposes Only” or ⬙For Recovery Purposes
Only⬙ you may install one (1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICE as a replacement copy for the existing SOFTWARE, and use it
in accordance with this EULA, including any additional EULA terms
accompanying the upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video, audio, music, text and
“applets,” incorporated into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the SOFTWARE, are owned by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, or their affiliates or
suppliers. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may not copy the
printed materials accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
460 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
property rights in and to the content which may be accessed through use
of the SOFTWARE is the property of the respective content owner and
may be protected by applicable copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no rights to use such content.
All rights not specifically granted under this EULA are reserved by MS,
Microsoft Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party software
and service providers, their affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through the SOFTWARE may be
governed by the respective terms of use relating to such services. If this
SOFTWARE contains documentation that is provided only in electronic
form, you may print one copy of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export jurisdiction. You agree to
comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S.
and other governments. For additional information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant you any rights in connection
with any trademarks or service marks of FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS,
Microsoft Corporation, third party software or service providers, their
affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is not
provided by MS, its parent corporation Microsoft Corporation, or their
affiliates or subsidiaries. For product support, please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in the documentation for the
DEVICE. Should you have any questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY
LAW, FORD MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
SERVICES SUPPLIERS, MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING
FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF
THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR THEIR AFFILIATES BE
LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY
EXPRESSLY BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW VEHICLE.
Appendices 461
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
End user notice
Microsoft姞 Windows姞 Mobile for Automotive Important Safety
Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software that is licensed to
Manufacturer FORD MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of Microsoft
Corporation pursuant to a license agreement. Any removal, reproduction,
reverse engineering or other unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license agreement is strictly prohibited and
may subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions
Before using your Windows Automotive-based system, read and follow all
instructions and safety information provided in this end user manual
(“User’s Guide”). Not following precautions found in this User’s Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious consequences.
Keep User’s Guide in Vehicle
When kept in the vehicle, the User’s Guide will be a ready reference for
you and other users unfamiliar with the Windows Automotive-based
system. Please make certain that before using the system for the first
time, all persons have access to the User’s Guide and read its
instructions and safety information carefully.
WARNING: Operating certain parts of this system while driving
can distract your attention away from the road, and possibly
cause an accident or other serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally (using your hands) while
driving. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting
these operations. This is important since while setting up or changing
some functions you might be required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from the wheel.
General operation
Voice Command Control
Functions within the Windows Automotive-based system may be
accomplished using only voice commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system without removing your hands
from the wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen
Do not access any function requiring a prolonged view of the screen while
you are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal manner before attempting to
462 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may be hazardous if your attention has
been diverted away from your driving task at a critical time.
Volume Setting
Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where
you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these sounds could cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions
Speech recognition software is inherently a statistical process which is
subject to errors. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features
Any navigation features included in the system are intended to provide
turn by turn instructions to get you to a desired destination. Please make
certain all persons using this system carefully read and follow
instructions and safety information fully.
Distraction Hazard
Any navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) setup.
Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can
seriously distract your attention and could cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail
Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving
decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing
traffic regulations. Any such feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made by this system should never
replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or
knowledge of safe driving practices.
Route Safety
Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe
or illegal maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if
you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. The driver
is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy
Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in
roads, traffic controls or driving conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the suggested routes.
Appendices 463
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Emergency Services
Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route
you to emergency services. Ask local authorities or an emergency
services operator for these locations. Not all emergency services such as
police, fire stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions carefully before you use the
TeleNav Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software indicates that
you accept these terms and conditions. If you do not accept these
terms and conditions, do not break the seal of the package, launch,
or otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and the privacy policy at any time,
with or without notice to you. You agree to visit http://www.telenav.com
from time to time to review the then current version of this Agreement
and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to the TeleNav Software may pose
a risk of injury or death to you and others in situations that otherwise
require your undivided attention, and you therefore agree to comply with
the following when using the TeleNav Software: (a) observe all traffic laws
and otherwise drive safely; (b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by the TeleNav Software
instructs you to perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver, places you in an
unsafe situation, or directs you into an area that you consider to be unsafe,
do not follow such instructions; (c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless your vehicle is stationary and
parked; (d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any illegal, unauthorized,
unintended, unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any manner
inconsistent with this Agreement; (e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere with your driving and will not
prevent the operation of any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav harmless against all claims
resulting from any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use of the TeleNav
Software in any moving vehicle, including as a result of your failure to
comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav Software, to provide
TeleNav with true, accurate, current, and complete information about
464 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav promptly of any changes to such
information, and to keep it true, accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal, non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software license), without the right to sublicense,
to use the TeleNav Software (in object code form only) in order to access
and use the TeleNav Software. This license shall terminate upon any
termination or expiration of this Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation services to other parties.
3.1 License limitations
You agree not to do any of the following: (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive the source code, audio
library or structure of the TeleNav Software without the prior express
written consent of TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav Software, or
alter, any of TeleNav’s or its suppliers’ trademarks, trade names, logos,
patent or copyright notices, or other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software; or (e) use the
TeleNav Software in any manner that (i) infringes the intellectual property
or proprietary rights, rights of publicity or privacy or other rights of any
party, (ii) violates any law, statute, ordinance or regulation, including but
not limited to laws and regulations related to spamming, privacy, consumer
and child protection, obscenity or defamation, or (iii) is harmful,
threatening, abusive, harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or otherwise
permit unauthorized access by third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or agents or employees of any of
the foregoing, be liable for any decision made or action taken by you or
anyone else in reliance on the information provided by the TeleNav
Software. TeleNav also does not warrant the accuracy of the map or
other data used for the TeleNav Software. Such data may not always
reflect reality due to, among other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing conditions. You are responsible
for the entire risk arising out of your use of the TeleNav Software. For
Appendices 465
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
example but without limitation, you agree not to rely on the TeleNav
Software for critical navigation in areas where the well-being or survival
of you or others is dependent on the accuracy of navigation, as the maps
or functionality of the TeleNav Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in more remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES
IN CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, WHETHER
STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL WARRANTIES
WHICH MAY ARISE FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR TRADE
AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR
THE INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF
DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL
DAMAGES REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL
DAMAGES IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND OF ALL OF
TELENAV’S SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or controversy arising out of or relating
to this Agreement or the TeleNav Software shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of Santa Clara, California. The
arbitrator shall apply the Commercial Arbitration Rules of the American
Arbitration Association, and the judgment upon the award rendered by the
466 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
arbitrator may be entered by any court having jurisdiction. Note that there
is no judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, without
giving effect to its conflict of laws provisions. To the extent judicial action
is necessary in connection with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav and
you agree to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the
County of Santa Clara, California. The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods shall not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this Agreement or any of your
rights or obligations, except in totality, in connection with your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav Software, and expressly conditioned
upon the new user of the TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound by the
terms and conditions of this Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted under this paragraph will result
in immediate termination of this Agreement, without liability to TeleNav,
in which case you and all other parties shall immediately cease all use of
the TeleNav Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing, TeleNav may
assign this Agreement to any other party at any time without notice,
provided the assignee remains bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between TeleNav and
you with respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2 Except for the limited licenses expressly granted in this Agreement,
TeleNav retains all right, title and interest in and to the TeleNav Software,
including without limitation all related intellectual property rights. No
licenses or other rights which are not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers and
licensors hereby reserve all of their respective rights other than the
licenses explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3 By using the TeleNav Software, you consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices, agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the TeleNav Software (collectively,
“Notices”) electronically. TeleNav may provide such Notices by posting
them on TeleNav’s Website or by downloading such Notices to your
wireless device. If you desire to withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your use of the TeleNav Software.
8.4 TeleNav’s or your failure to require performance of any provision shall
Appendices 467
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
not affect that party’s right to require performance at any time thereafter,
nor shall a waiver of any breach or default of this Agreement constitute a
waiver of any subsequent breach or default or a waiver of the provision
itself.
8.5 If any provision herein is held unenforceable, then such provision will
be modified to reflect the intention of the parties, and the remaining
provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect.
8.6 The headings in this Agreement are for convenience of reference only,
will not be deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and will not be referred
to in connection with the construction or interpretation of this Agreement.
As used in this Agreement, the words “include” and “including,” and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be terms of limitation, but rather
will be deemed to be followed by the words “without limitation.”
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The TeleNav Software utilizes map and other data licensed to
TeleNav by third party vendors for the benefit of you and other end
users. This Agreement includes end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this Agreement), and thus your
use of the TeleNav Software is also subject to such terms. You agree to
comply with the following additional terms and conditions, which
are applicable to TeleNav’s third party vendor licensors:
NavTeq End User License Agreement
END USER TERMS
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed, not sold. By opening this
package, or installing, copying, or otherwise using the Data, you agree to
be bound by the terms of this agreement. If you do not agree to the
terms of this agreement, you are not permitted to install, copy, use,
resell or transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the terms of this
agreement, and have not installed, copied, or used the Data, you must
contact your retailer or NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) within
thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of your purchase price. To
contact NT, please visit www.navteq.com.
The Data is provided for your personal, internal use only and may not be
resold. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
(this “End User License Agreement”) and conditions which are agreed to
by you, on the one hand, and NAVTEQ North America, LLC (“NT”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
The Data for areas of Canada includes information taken with permission
from Canadian authorities, including: 娀 Her Majesty the Queen in Right
of Canada, 娀 Queen’s Printer for Ontario, 娀 Canada Post Corporation,
GeoBase 威.
468 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
NT holds a nonexclusive license from the United States Postal Service 威
to publish and sell ZIP+4 威 information.
娀 United States Postal Service 威 2009. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United States Postal Service 威. The
following trademarks and registrations are owned by the USPS: United
States Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.
The Data for Mexico includes certain Data from Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use: You agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on use for solely personal,
noncommercial purposes, and not for service bureau, timesharing or
other similar purposes. Except as otherwise set forth herein, you agree
not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data, and may not transfer or
distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer: Your limited license does not allow
transfer or resale of the Data, except on the condition that you may
transfer the Data and all accompanying materials on a permanent basis
if: (a) you retain no copies of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End User License Agreement; and (c) you transfer the Data
in the exact same form as you purchased it by physically transferring the
original media (e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased), all original
packaging, all Manuals and other documentation. Specifically, Multi-disc
sets may only be transferred or sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations: Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by NT in a separate written agreement, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph, your license is conditioned on
use of the Data as prescribed in this agreement, and you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b) with, or in communication
with, including without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Appendices 469
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
WARNING: This Data may contain inaccurate or incomplete
information due to the passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting comprehensive geographic
Data, any of which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty: This Data is provided to you “as is”, and you agree to use it
at your own risk. NT and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers)
make no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or
implied, arising by law or otherwise, including but not limited to, content,
quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this Data,
or that the Data or server will be uninterrupted or error free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain warranty exclusions, so to that extent the above exclusion
may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: NT AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF
THE NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION
ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT,
WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS
DATA; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY, EVEN
IF NT OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories and
Countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations,
so to that extent the above may not apply to you.
Export Control: You agree not to export from anywhere any part of the
Data or any direct product thereof except in compliance with, and with
all licenses and approvals required under, applicable export laws, rules
and regulations, including but not limited to the laws, rules and
regulations administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and Security
470 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
of the U.S. Department of Commerce. To the extent that any such export
laws, rules or regulations prohibit NT from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement: These terms and conditions constitute the entire
agreement between NT (and its licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability: You and NT agree that if any portion of this agreement is
found illegal or unenforceable, that portion shall be severed and the
remainder of the Agreement shall be given full force and effect.
Governing Law: The above terms and conditions shall be governed by
the laws of the State of Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations Convention for Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded. You agree
to submit to the personal jurisdiction of the State of Illinois for any and
all disputes, claims and actions arising from or in connection with the
Data provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users: If the Data is being acquired by or on behalf
of the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily claimed by the United States
government, this Data is a “commercial item” as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in accordance with this End User
License Agreement, and each copy of Data delivered or otherwise
furnished shall be marked and embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use”, and be treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/ SUPPLIER)
NAME:
NAVTEQ
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL 60606.
This Data is a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the EndUser License Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
娀 2011 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
Appendices 471
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
If the Contracting Officer, federal government agency, or any federal
official refuses to use the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any federal official must notify
NAVTEQ prior to seeking additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Wi-Fi hotspot data provided by JiWire 娀2013 JiWire.
Gracenote姞 Copyright
CD and music — related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright 娀
2000–2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright 娀 2000–2007
Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or more of the
following U.S. Patents #5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents issued
or pending. Some services supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc.
for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote. The
Gracenote logo and logotype, and the ⬙Powered by Gracenote™⬙ logo are
trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote姞 End User License Agreement (EULA)
This device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 (“Gracenote”).
The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables this
device to do disc and music file identification and obtain music-related
information, including name, artist, track, and title information
(“Gracenote Data”) from online servers (“Gracenote Servers”), and to
perform other functions. You may use Gracenote Data only by means of
the intended End User functions of this device
This device may contain content belonging to Gracenote’s providers. If
so, all of the restrictions set forth herein with respect to Gracenote Data
shall also apply to such content and such content providers shall be
entitled to all of the benefits and protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content from Gracenote (“Gracenote
Content”), Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign,
copy, transfer or transmit the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software or
any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag associated with a music file) to any
third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses to use the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will
472 Appendices
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your licenses terminate, you
agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote, respectively,
reserve all rights in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the
Gracenote Servers and Gracenote Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either Gracenote become liable for any
payment to you for any information that you provide, including any
copyrighted material or music file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each company’s own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical
purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to
allow Gracenote to count queries without knowing anything about who
you are. For more information, see the web page at www.gracenote.com
for the Gracenote Privacy Policy
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND
THE GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.” NEITHER
GRACENOTE MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT FROM THE
COMPANIES’ RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF GRACENOTE,
CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE DEEMS
SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS
ARE ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED.
GRACENOTE IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY
CHOOSE TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO DISCONTINUE
ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY
YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY GRACENOTE
SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER.
娀 Gracenote 2007
Appendices 473
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
911 Assist™ ..............................387
A
ABS (see Brakes) .....................213
Accessing call history/phone
book during active call .............376
Accessing the help screen .......447
Accessing the music in
your jukebox .....................441–442
Accessing your media menu
features ......................................399
Accessing your phone menu
features ......................................378
Accessory delay ..........................91
Active call menu options .........376
Advanced menu options ...385, 406
Advanced menu options
(prompts, languages, defaults,
master reset, installing
applications) ..............................385
Airbag supplemental restraint
system ..........................................47
and child safety seats ..............49
description ................................47
disposal ......................................53
driver airbag ..............................47
passenger airbag .......................47
side airbag ...........................47, 49
Air cleaner filter .......288–289, 343
Air filter .............................289, 343
Air suspension ...........................227
description ..............................227
All Wheel Drive (AWD),
driving off road .........................205
Ambulance packages ..................15
AM/FM .......................................424
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................279
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ..............................213
Anti-theft system ..................75, 77
arming the system ..............75, 77
disarming a triggered system ..77
AppLink™ .................................394
Audio system
Single CD ................................117
Audio system (see Radio) .......117
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .................................200
fluid, adding ............................283
fluid, checking ........................283
fluid, refill capacities ..............340
fluid, specification ..................340
Auxiliary input jack (Line in) ..123
Auxiliary powerpoint ................181
Axle
lubricant specifications ..........340
refill capacities ........................340
B
Battery .......................................285
acid, treating emergencies .....285
jumping a disabled battery ....255
maintenance-free ....................285
replacement, specifications ...343
servicing ..................................285
Booster seats ...............................22
Brakes ........................................213
anti-lock ...................................213
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................213
brake warning light ................213
474 Index
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
fluid, checking and adding ....284
fluid, refill capacities ..............340
fluid, specifications .................340
lubricant specifications ..........340
parking ....................................214
shift interlock ..........................203
trailer .......................................244
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....340
Car2U威 Home Automation
System .......................................171
Cargo management system ......236
CD ..............................................117
CD player ..................................115
CD voice commands ................437,
440–441
Cell phone use ............................16
Changing a tire .........................330
Changing the air filter ..............289
Child safety seats
automatic locking mode
(retractor) .................................38
LATCH .......................................27
Child safety seats -
booster seats ...............................22
Cleaning the touchscreen ........419
Cleaning your vehicle ...............298
engine compartment ..............300
instrument panel ....................302
interior .............................301–302
plastic parts ............................299
washing ....................................298
waxing .....................................300
wheels ......................................303
wiper blades ............................301
Clock ..................................114, 117
Console
overhead ............................94, 184
Controls
power seat ...............................156
Coolant ......................................279
checking and adding ..............279
refill capacities ........................340
specifications ..........................340
Creating a playlist .....................443
Cruise control ...........................224
Customer Assistance ................253
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..................................348, 350
Getting assistance outside
the U.S. and Canada ..............262
Getting roadside assistance ...253
Getting the service you
need .........................................258
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................264
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................262
Customizing your home
screen ........................................417
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................87
Defrost ...............................146, 148
rear window ............................152
Dipstick
automatic transmission
fluid ..........................................283
engine oil .................................278
Driving under special
conditions ..................204, 209–210
sand .........................................209
Index 475
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
snow and ice ...........................211
through water .................210, 250
Dual automatic temperature
control (DATC) .................146, 148
DVD (if equipped) ....................127
DVD region coding ...................135
DVD system ...............................127
E
Electronic message center .......104
Electronic stability control ......217
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................255
running out of fuel .................192
Emission control system ..........196
End user license agreement ....457
Engine ........................................339
cleaning ...................................300
coolant .....................................279
fail-safe cooling .......................282
idle speed control ...................285
lubrication specifications .......340
refill capacities ........................340
service points ..........................277
Engine block heater .................188
Engine oil
checking and adding ..............278
dipstick ....................................278
filter, specifications ................343
refill capacities ........................340
specifications ..........................340
Event data recording ..................12
Exhaust fumes ..........................188
F
Fail safe cooling ........................282
Fleet MyKey programming ........58
Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) ....190
Floor mats .................................251
Fluid capacities .........................340
Fog lamps ....................................87
Forward and reverse sensing
system ........................................219
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......205
description ..............................206
driving off road .......................207
indicator light .........................205
Fuel
cap ...........................................194
capacity ...................................340
choosing the right fuel ...........191
filler funnel .............................192
filling your vehicle with fuel ..194
filter, specifications ................284
fuel pump shut-off ..................254
octane rating ...................192, 339
quality ......................................191
running out of fuel .................192
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................190
Fuel - flex fuel vehicle
(FFV) .................................190–191
Fuses ..........................266–267, 271
G
Garage door opener ..........171, 175
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............194
Gauges .........................................97
H
Hazard flashers .........................254
HD Radio™ ...............................427
476 Index
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Headlamps ...................................85
aiming ......................................291
autolamp system .......................86
bulb specifications ..................297
checking alignment ................291
daytime running lights .............87
flash to pass ..............................85
high beam .................................85
replacing bulbs .......................293
turning on and off ....................85
Head restraints .........................154
Heating ..............................146, 148
Homelink wireless control
system ........................................175
Hood ..........................................276
I
Ignition ...............................186, 339
Illuminated visor mirror .............95
Information displays .................104
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................199
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................302
cluster ........................................99
J
Jack ............................................330
positioning ...............................330
storage .....................................330
Joining two calls
(multiparty/conference call) ....376
Jukebox features .......................441
Jump-starting your vehicle ......255
K
Keyless entry system
autolock .....................................66
keypad .......................................72
locking and unlocking doors ....74
programming entry code .........72
Keys .......................................55, 76
positions of the ignition .........186
L
Lamps ..........................................85
autolamp system .......................86
bulb replacement
specifications chart ................297
daytime running light ...............87
fog lamps ...................................87
headlamps .................................85
headlamps, flash to pass ..........85
interior lamps ...........................88
replacing bulbs ...............293, 296
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................87
LATCH anchors ...........................27
Liftgate ..................................65, 68
Lights, warning and indicator ....99
Loading instructions .................235
Loading pictures .......................417
Load limits .................................229
Locks
autolock .....................................66
childproof ..................................34
doors ..........................................64
Lubricant specifications ...........340
Lug nuts ....................................338
Index 477
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
M
MAP DVD - Loading and
Unloading ..................................135
Map icons ..................................452
Map mode ..................................451
Map updates ..............................454
Master lighting switch ................85
Media Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................405
Message center .........................104
warning messages ...................110
Mirrors ...................................91, 93
programmable memory ............56
side view mirrors (power) .......91
signal .........................................92
Moon roof ....................................95
Motorcraft威 parts ..............298, 343
MyKey ..........................................58
N
Navigation features ...................448
O
Octane rating ............................192
P
Pairing other phones ................374
Pairing your phone for the
first time ....................................373
Parental MyKey programming ...58
Parking brake ............................214
Parts
(see Motorcraft威 parts) ...........343
Phone Bluetooth menu options
(adding, connecting, deleting,
turning on/off) ..........................384
Phone redial ..............................378
Playing a DVD in the system ...135
Playing music (by artist,
album, genre, playlist,
tracks, similar) ..........................402
POI categories ...........................450
Point of Interest (POI) .............450
Power deployable running
boards ........................................237
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) .......................267, 271
Power door locks ........................64
Power liftgate ..............................68
Power mirrors .............................91
Powerpoint ................................181
Power steering ..........................226
fluid, checking and adding ....284
fluid, refill capacity ................340
fluid, specifications .................340
Power Windows ...........................90
Privacy information ..................370
Putting a call on/off hold .........376
Q
Quick touch buttons .................453
R
Radio ..........................................117
Single CD ................................117
Radio reception .........................115
478 Index
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Radio voice commands .....425, 431
Rear heated seats .....................168
Rear seat entertainment
system ........................................127
Rear view camera display ........221
Rear window defroster .....146, 148
Receiving a text message .........380
Recommendations for
attaching safety restraints for
children ........................................24
Relays ................................266–267
Remote entry system
illuminated entry ......................67
locking/unlocking doors ...........64
opening the trunk .....................65
replacing the batteries .............55
Roadside assistance ..................253
Roll stability control .................217
Roof rack ...................................228
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ............44
Safety belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............37
Safety defects, reporting ..........265
Safety information ....................369
Safety restraints ..............37–38, 40
Belt-Minder威 .............................41
extension assembly ..................39
for adults .............................37–38
for children .........................19, 24
safety belt maintenance ...........44
seat belt maintenance ..............44
warning light and chime ..........41
Safety restraints -
LATCH anchors ...........................27
Safety seats for children ......19, 24
Safety Compliance
Certification Label ....................345
Satellite Radio ...........................435
Scheduled Maintenance Guide
Normal Scheduled
Maintenance and Log .............356
SD card ......................................448
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) ...............37
Seats
child safety seats ................19, 24
climate control ........................160
filter .........................................343
heated ......................................168
memory seat .....................56, 158
SecuriCode keyless entry
system ..........................................72
SecuriLock passive anti-theft
system ..........................................75
Selecting your media source
(USB, Line in, BT audio) .........399
Setting a destination ................448
Setting the clock .......................117
Side air curtain ...........................50
Side-curtain airbags system .......50
SIRIUS威 satellite radio .....431, 448
SIRIUS satellite radio voice
commands .................................434
SIRIUS Travel Link ...................444
Snowplowing ...............................15
SOS Post Crash Alert .................47
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................339, 343
Index 479
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Special notice
ambulance conversions ............15
Specification chart,
lubricants ...................................340
Stability system .........................217
Starting a flex fuel vehicle .......187
Starting your vehicle ........186–187
jump starting ..........................255
Status bars ................................417
Steering wheel ............................79
controls ......................................80
tilting .........................................79
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) (see airbags) ....................47
SYNC威 AppLink™ ....................394
SYNC威 customer support .........369
SYNC威 Services .........................392
System overview .......................414
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) .......146, 148
Text messaging .........................380
Text messaging (sending,
downloading, deleting) .....380, 382
Third-row power fold seat .......170
Tilt steering wheel ......................79
Tires ...........................310–311, 330
alignment ................................324
care ..........................................310
changing ..........................330, 332
checking the pressure ............320
inflating ...................................318
label .........................................317
replacing ..................................322
rotating ....................................324
safety practices .......................323
sidewall information ...............313
snow tires and chains ............325
spare tire .................................330
terminology .............................311
tire grades ...............................311
treadwear ........................310, 320
Towing .......................239, 247–248
recreational towing .................248
trailer towing ..........................239
wrecker ....................................247
Traction control ........................215
Traffic, Directions and
Information ................................392
Trailer sway control ..................239
Transmission
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....203
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................283
fluid, refill capacities ..............340
lubricant specifications ..........340
Troubleshooting ................142, 456
Turn signal ..................................87
U
Universal garage door opener ..171
USB port ....................................124
Using privacy mode ..................376
V
Vehicle health report ................390
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) ..........................................344
Vehicle loading ..........................229
Ventilating your vehicle ...........188
480 Index
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
Voice commands in media
mode ..........................................397
Voice commands in phone
mode ..........................................374
Voice recognition ......................419
W
Warning lights (see Lights) .......99
Washer fluid ......................284–285
Water, Driving through .............250
Where am I? ..............................444
Windows
power .........................................90
rear wiper/washer .....................84
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers ..........................................83
checking and adding
fluid ..................................284–285
replacing wiper blades ...........287
Wrecker towing .........................247
Index 481
2013 Navigator (nav)
Owners Guide gf, 1st Printing
USA (fus)
